|
7
|
1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
|
|
|
2 *
|
|
|
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar
|
|
|
4 *
|
|
|
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
|
|
|
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
|
|
|
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
|
|
|
8 */
|
|
|
9
|
|
|
10 /*
|
|
|
11 * Porting to GTK+ was done by:
|
|
|
12 *
|
|
70
|
13 * (C) 1998,1999,2000 by Marcin Dalecki <martin@dalecki.de>
|
|
7
|
14 *
|
|
|
15 * With GREAT support and continuous encouragements by Andy Kahn and of
|
|
|
16 * course Bram Moolenaar!
|
|
|
17 *
|
|
|
18 * Support for GTK+ 2 was added by:
|
|
|
19 *
|
|
|
20 * (C) 2002,2003 Jason Hildebrand <jason@peaceworks.ca>
|
|
|
21 * Daniel Elstner <daniel.elstner@gmx.net>
|
|
|
22 */
|
|
|
23
|
|
|
24 #include "vim.h"
|
|
1666
|
25
|
|
7
|
26 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
27 /* Gnome redefines _() and N_(). Grrr... */
|
|
|
28 # ifdef _
|
|
|
29 # undef _
|
|
|
30 # endif
|
|
|
31 # ifdef N_
|
|
|
32 # undef N_
|
|
|
33 # endif
|
|
|
34 # ifdef textdomain
|
|
|
35 # undef textdomain
|
|
|
36 # endif
|
|
|
37 # ifdef bindtextdomain
|
|
|
38 # undef bindtextdomain
|
|
|
39 # endif
|
|
1286
|
40 # ifdef bind_textdomain_codeset
|
|
|
41 # undef bind_textdomain_codeset
|
|
1226
|
42 # endif
|
|
7
|
43 # if defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) && !defined(ENABLE_NLS)
|
|
|
44 # define ENABLE_NLS /* so the texts in the dialog boxes are translated */
|
|
|
45 # endif
|
|
|
46 # include <gnome.h>
|
|
|
47 # include "version.h"
|
|
798
|
48 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
49 /* missing prototype in bonobo-dock-item.h */
|
|
|
50 extern void bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(BonoboDockItem *dock_item, BonoboDockItemBehavior beh);
|
|
|
51 # endif
|
|
7
|
52 #endif
|
|
|
53
|
|
|
54 #if !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
55 /* When generating prototypes we don't want syntax errors. */
|
|
|
56 # define GdkAtom int
|
|
|
57 # define GdkEventExpose int
|
|
|
58 # define GdkEventFocus int
|
|
|
59 # define GdkEventVisibility int
|
|
|
60 # define GdkEventProperty int
|
|
|
61 # define GtkContainer int
|
|
|
62 # define GtkTargetEntry int
|
|
|
63 # define GtkType int
|
|
|
64 # define GtkWidget int
|
|
|
65 # define gint int
|
|
|
66 # define gpointer int
|
|
|
67 # define guint int
|
|
|
68 # define GdkEventKey int
|
|
|
69 # define GdkEventSelection int
|
|
|
70 # define GtkSelectionData int
|
|
|
71 # define GdkEventMotion int
|
|
|
72 # define GdkEventButton int
|
|
|
73 # define GdkDragContext int
|
|
|
74 # define GdkEventConfigure int
|
|
|
75 # define GdkEventClient int
|
|
|
76 #else
|
|
|
77 # include <gdk/gdkkeysyms.h>
|
|
|
78 # include <gdk/gdk.h>
|
|
|
79 # ifdef WIN3264
|
|
|
80 # include <gdk/gdkwin32.h>
|
|
|
81 # else
|
|
|
82 # include <gdk/gdkx.h>
|
|
|
83 # endif
|
|
|
84
|
|
|
85 # include <gtk/gtk.h>
|
|
|
86 # include "gui_gtk_f.h"
|
|
|
87 #endif
|
|
|
88
|
|
|
89 #ifdef HAVE_X11_SUNKEYSYM_H
|
|
|
90 # include <X11/Sunkeysym.h>
|
|
|
91 #endif
|
|
|
92
|
|
|
93 /*
|
|
|
94 * Easy-to-use macro for multihead support.
|
|
|
95 */
|
|
|
96 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
97 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom_for_display( \
|
|
|
98 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin), atom)
|
|
|
99 #else
|
|
|
100 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) ((Atom)(atom))
|
|
|
101 #endif
|
|
|
102
|
|
|
103 /* Selection type distinguishers */
|
|
|
104 enum
|
|
|
105 {
|
|
|
106 TARGET_TYPE_NONE,
|
|
|
107 TARGET_UTF8_STRING,
|
|
|
108 TARGET_STRING,
|
|
|
109 TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT,
|
|
|
110 TARGET_TEXT,
|
|
|
111 TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST,
|
|
|
112 TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN,
|
|
|
113 TARGET_VIM,
|
|
|
114 TARGET_VIMENC
|
|
|
115 };
|
|
|
116
|
|
|
117 /*
|
|
|
118 * Table of selection targets supported by Vim.
|
|
|
119 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first.
|
|
|
120 */
|
|
|
121 static const GtkTargetEntry selection_targets[] =
|
|
|
122 {
|
|
|
123 {VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIMENC},
|
|
|
124 {VIM_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIM},
|
|
|
125 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
126 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING},
|
|
|
127 #endif
|
|
|
128 {"COMPOUND_TEXT", 0, TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT},
|
|
|
129 {"TEXT", 0, TARGET_TEXT},
|
|
|
130 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING}
|
|
|
131 };
|
|
|
132 #define N_SELECTION_TARGETS (sizeof(selection_targets) / sizeof(selection_targets[0]))
|
|
|
133
|
|
|
134 #ifdef FEAT_DND
|
|
|
135 /*
|
|
|
136 * Table of DnD targets supported by Vim.
|
|
|
137 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first.
|
|
|
138 */
|
|
|
139 static const GtkTargetEntry dnd_targets[] =
|
|
|
140 {
|
|
|
141 {"text/uri-list", 0, TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST},
|
|
|
142 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
143 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING},
|
|
|
144 # endif
|
|
|
145 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING},
|
|
|
146 {"text/plain", 0, TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN}
|
|
|
147 };
|
|
|
148 # define N_DND_TARGETS (sizeof(dnd_targets) / sizeof(dnd_targets[0]))
|
|
|
149 #endif
|
|
|
150
|
|
|
151
|
|
|
152 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
153 /*
|
|
|
154 * "Monospace" is a standard font alias that should be present
|
|
|
155 * on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations.
|
|
|
156 */
|
|
|
157 # define DEFAULT_FONT "Monospace 10"
|
|
|
158
|
|
|
159 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
160 /*
|
|
|
161 * This is the single only fixed width font in X11, which seems to be present
|
|
|
162 * on all servers and available in all the variants we need.
|
|
|
163 */
|
|
|
164 # define DEFAULT_FONT "-adobe-courier-medium-r-normal-*-14-*-*-*-m-*-*-*"
|
|
|
165
|
|
|
166 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
167
|
|
|
168 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION))
|
|
|
169 /*
|
|
|
170 * Atoms used to communicate save-yourself from the X11 session manager. There
|
|
|
171 * is no need to move them into the GUI struct, since they should be constant.
|
|
|
172 */
|
|
|
173 static GdkAtom wm_protocols_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
174 static GdkAtom save_yourself_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
175 #endif
|
|
|
176
|
|
|
177 /*
|
|
|
178 * Atoms used to control/reference X11 selections.
|
|
|
179 */
|
|
|
180 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
181 static GdkAtom utf8_string_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
182 #endif
|
|
|
183 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
184 static GdkAtom compound_text_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
185 static GdkAtom text_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
186 #endif
|
|
|
187 static GdkAtom vim_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's own special selection format */
|
|
|
188 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
189 static GdkAtom vimenc_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's extended selection format */
|
|
|
190 #endif
|
|
|
191
|
|
|
192 /*
|
|
|
193 * Keycodes recognized by vim.
|
|
|
194 * NOTE: when changing this, the table in gui_x11.c probably needs the same
|
|
|
195 * change!
|
|
|
196 */
|
|
|
197 static struct special_key
|
|
|
198 {
|
|
|
199 guint key_sym;
|
|
|
200 char_u code0;
|
|
|
201 char_u code1;
|
|
|
202 }
|
|
|
203 const special_keys[] =
|
|
|
204 {
|
|
|
205 {GDK_Up, 'k', 'u'},
|
|
|
206 {GDK_Down, 'k', 'd'},
|
|
|
207 {GDK_Left, 'k', 'l'},
|
|
|
208 {GDK_Right, 'k', 'r'},
|
|
|
209 {GDK_F1, 'k', '1'},
|
|
|
210 {GDK_F2, 'k', '2'},
|
|
|
211 {GDK_F3, 'k', '3'},
|
|
|
212 {GDK_F4, 'k', '4'},
|
|
|
213 {GDK_F5, 'k', '5'},
|
|
|
214 {GDK_F6, 'k', '6'},
|
|
|
215 {GDK_F7, 'k', '7'},
|
|
|
216 {GDK_F8, 'k', '8'},
|
|
|
217 {GDK_F9, 'k', '9'},
|
|
|
218 {GDK_F10, 'k', ';'},
|
|
|
219 {GDK_F11, 'F', '1'},
|
|
|
220 {GDK_F12, 'F', '2'},
|
|
|
221 {GDK_F13, 'F', '3'},
|
|
|
222 {GDK_F14, 'F', '4'},
|
|
|
223 {GDK_F15, 'F', '5'},
|
|
|
224 {GDK_F16, 'F', '6'},
|
|
|
225 {GDK_F17, 'F', '7'},
|
|
|
226 {GDK_F18, 'F', '8'},
|
|
|
227 {GDK_F19, 'F', '9'},
|
|
|
228 {GDK_F20, 'F', 'A'},
|
|
|
229 {GDK_F21, 'F', 'B'},
|
|
|
230 {GDK_Pause, 'F', 'B'}, /* Pause == F21 according to netbeans.txt */
|
|
|
231 {GDK_F22, 'F', 'C'},
|
|
|
232 {GDK_F23, 'F', 'D'},
|
|
|
233 {GDK_F24, 'F', 'E'},
|
|
|
234 {GDK_F25, 'F', 'F'},
|
|
|
235 {GDK_F26, 'F', 'G'},
|
|
|
236 {GDK_F27, 'F', 'H'},
|
|
|
237 {GDK_F28, 'F', 'I'},
|
|
|
238 {GDK_F29, 'F', 'J'},
|
|
|
239 {GDK_F30, 'F', 'K'},
|
|
|
240 {GDK_F31, 'F', 'L'},
|
|
|
241 {GDK_F32, 'F', 'M'},
|
|
|
242 {GDK_F33, 'F', 'N'},
|
|
|
243 {GDK_F34, 'F', 'O'},
|
|
|
244 {GDK_F35, 'F', 'P'},
|
|
|
245 #ifdef SunXK_F36
|
|
|
246 {SunXK_F36, 'F', 'Q'},
|
|
|
247 {SunXK_F37, 'F', 'R'},
|
|
|
248 #endif
|
|
|
249 {GDK_Help, '%', '1'},
|
|
|
250 {GDK_Undo, '&', '8'},
|
|
|
251 {GDK_BackSpace, 'k', 'b'},
|
|
|
252 {GDK_Insert, 'k', 'I'},
|
|
|
253 {GDK_Delete, 'k', 'D'},
|
|
|
254 {GDK_3270_BackTab, 'k', 'B'},
|
|
|
255 {GDK_Clear, 'k', 'C'},
|
|
|
256 {GDK_Home, 'k', 'h'},
|
|
|
257 {GDK_End, '@', '7'},
|
|
|
258 {GDK_Prior, 'k', 'P'},
|
|
|
259 {GDK_Next, 'k', 'N'},
|
|
|
260 {GDK_Print, '%', '9'},
|
|
|
261 /* Keypad keys: */
|
|
|
262 {GDK_KP_Left, 'k', 'l'},
|
|
|
263 {GDK_KP_Right, 'k', 'r'},
|
|
|
264 {GDK_KP_Up, 'k', 'u'},
|
|
|
265 {GDK_KP_Down, 'k', 'd'},
|
|
|
266 {GDK_KP_Insert, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KINS},
|
|
|
267 {GDK_KP_Delete, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KDEL},
|
|
|
268 {GDK_KP_Home, 'K', '1'},
|
|
|
269 {GDK_KP_End, 'K', '4'},
|
|
|
270 {GDK_KP_Prior, 'K', '3'}, /* page up */
|
|
|
271 {GDK_KP_Next, 'K', '5'}, /* page down */
|
|
|
272
|
|
|
273 {GDK_KP_Add, 'K', '6'},
|
|
|
274 {GDK_KP_Subtract, 'K', '7'},
|
|
|
275 {GDK_KP_Divide, 'K', '8'},
|
|
|
276 {GDK_KP_Multiply, 'K', '9'},
|
|
|
277 {GDK_KP_Enter, 'K', 'A'},
|
|
|
278 {GDK_KP_Decimal, 'K', 'B'},
|
|
|
279
|
|
|
280 {GDK_KP_0, 'K', 'C'},
|
|
|
281 {GDK_KP_1, 'K', 'D'},
|
|
|
282 {GDK_KP_2, 'K', 'E'},
|
|
|
283 {GDK_KP_3, 'K', 'F'},
|
|
|
284 {GDK_KP_4, 'K', 'G'},
|
|
|
285 {GDK_KP_5, 'K', 'H'},
|
|
|
286 {GDK_KP_6, 'K', 'I'},
|
|
|
287 {GDK_KP_7, 'K', 'J'},
|
|
|
288 {GDK_KP_8, 'K', 'K'},
|
|
|
289 {GDK_KP_9, 'K', 'L'},
|
|
|
290
|
|
|
291 /* End of list marker: */
|
|
|
292 {0, 0, 0}
|
|
|
293 };
|
|
|
294
|
|
|
295 /*
|
|
|
296 * Flags for command line options table below.
|
|
|
297 */
|
|
|
298 #define ARG_FONT 1
|
|
|
299 #define ARG_GEOMETRY 2
|
|
|
300 #define ARG_REVERSE 3
|
|
|
301 #define ARG_NOREVERSE 4
|
|
|
302 #define ARG_BACKGROUND 5
|
|
|
303 #define ARG_FOREGROUND 6
|
|
|
304 #define ARG_ICONIC 7
|
|
|
305 #define ARG_ROLE 8
|
|
|
306 #define ARG_NETBEANS 9
|
|
|
307 #define ARG_XRM 10 /* ignored */
|
|
|
308 #define ARG_MENUFONT 11 /* ignored */
|
|
|
309 #define ARG_INDEX_MASK 0x00ff
|
|
|
310 #define ARG_HAS_VALUE 0x0100 /* a value is expected after the argument */
|
|
|
311 #define ARG_NEEDS_GUI 0x0200 /* need to initialize the GUI for this */
|
|
|
312 #define ARG_FOR_GTK 0x0400 /* argument is handled by GTK+ or GNOME */
|
|
|
313 #define ARG_COMPAT_LONG 0x0800 /* accept -foo but substitute with --foo */
|
|
|
314 #define ARG_KEEP 0x1000 /* don't remove argument from argv[] */
|
|
|
315
|
|
|
316 /*
|
|
|
317 * This table holds all the X GUI command line options allowed. This includes
|
|
|
318 * the standard ones so that we can skip them when Vim is started without the
|
|
|
319 * GUI (but the GUI might start up later).
|
|
|
320 *
|
|
|
321 * When changing this, also update doc/gui_x11.txt and the usage message!!!
|
|
|
322 */
|
|
|
323 typedef struct
|
|
|
324 {
|
|
|
325 const char *name;
|
|
|
326 unsigned int flags;
|
|
|
327 }
|
|
|
328 cmdline_option_T;
|
|
|
329
|
|
|
330 static const cmdline_option_T cmdline_options[] =
|
|
|
331 {
|
|
|
332 /* We handle these options ourselves */
|
|
|
333 {"-fn", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
334 {"-font", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
335 {"-geom", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
336 {"-geometry", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
337 {"-rv", ARG_REVERSE},
|
|
|
338 {"-reverse", ARG_REVERSE},
|
|
|
339 {"+rv", ARG_NOREVERSE},
|
|
|
340 {"+reverse", ARG_NOREVERSE},
|
|
|
341 {"-bg", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
342 {"-background", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
343 {"-fg", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
344 {"-foreground", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
345 {"-iconic", ARG_ICONIC},
|
|
|
346 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
347 {"--role", ARG_ROLE|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
348 #endif
|
|
|
349 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
|
|
|
350 {"-nb", ARG_NETBEANS}, /* non-standard value format */
|
|
|
351 {"-xrm", ARG_XRM|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */
|
|
|
352 {"-mf", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */
|
|
|
353 {"-menufont", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */
|
|
|
354 #endif
|
|
|
355 #if 0 /* not implemented; these arguments don't make sense for GTK+ */
|
|
|
356 {"-boldfont", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
357 {"-italicfont", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
358 {"-bw", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
359 {"-borderwidth", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
360 {"-sw", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
361 {"-scrollbarwidth", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
362 #endif
|
|
|
363 /* Arguments handled by GTK (and GNOME) internally. */
|
|
|
364 {"--g-fatal-warnings", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
365 {"--gdk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
366 {"--gdk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
367 {"--gtk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
368 {"--gtk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
369 {"--gtk-module", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
370 {"--sync", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
371 {"--display", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG},
|
|
|
372 {"--name", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG},
|
|
|
373 {"--class", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG},
|
|
|
374 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
375 {"--screen", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
376 {"--gxid-host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
377 {"--gxid-port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
378 #else /* these don't seem to exist anymore */
|
|
|
379 {"--no-xshm", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
380 {"--xim-preedit", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
381 {"--xim-status", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
382 {"--gxid_host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
383 {"--gxid_port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
384 #endif
|
|
|
385 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
386 {"--load-modules", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
387 {"--sm-client-id", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
388 {"--sm-config-prefix", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
389 {"--sm-disable", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
390 {"--oaf-ior-fd", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
391 {"--oaf-activate-iid", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
392 {"--oaf-private", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
393 {"--enable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
394 {"--disable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
395 {"--espeaker", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
396 {"-?", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI},
|
|
|
397 {"--help", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI|ARG_KEEP},
|
|
|
398 {"--usage", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI},
|
|
|
399 # if 0 /* conflicts with Vim's own --version argument */
|
|
|
400 {"--version", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI},
|
|
|
401 # endif
|
|
|
402 {"--disable-crash-dialog", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
403 #endif
|
|
|
404 {NULL, 0}
|
|
|
405 };
|
|
|
406
|
|
|
407 static int gui_argc = 0;
|
|
|
408 static char **gui_argv = NULL;
|
|
|
409
|
|
|
410 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
411 static const char *role_argument = NULL;
|
|
|
412 #endif
|
|
|
413 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
414 static const char *restart_command = NULL;
|
|
1898
|
415 static char *abs_restart_command = NULL;
|
|
7
|
416 #endif
|
|
|
417 static int found_iconic_arg = FALSE;
|
|
|
418
|
|
|
419 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
420 /*
|
|
|
421 * Can't use Gnome if --socketid given
|
|
|
422 */
|
|
|
423 static int using_gnome = 0;
|
|
|
424 #else
|
|
|
425 # define using_gnome 0
|
|
|
426 #endif
|
|
|
427
|
|
|
428 /*
|
|
|
429 * Parse the GUI related command-line arguments. Any arguments used are
|
|
|
430 * deleted from argv, and *argc is decremented accordingly. This is called
|
|
|
431 * when vim is started, whether or not the GUI has been started.
|
|
|
432 */
|
|
|
433 void
|
|
|
434 gui_mch_prepare(int *argc, char **argv)
|
|
|
435 {
|
|
|
436 const cmdline_option_T *option;
|
|
|
437 int i = 0;
|
|
|
438 int len = 0;
|
|
|
439
|
|
|
440 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
441 /*
|
|
|
442 * Determine the command used to invoke Vim, to be passed as restart
|
|
|
443 * command to the session manager. If argv[0] contains any directory
|
|
|
444 * components try building an absolute path, otherwise leave it as is.
|
|
|
445 */
|
|
|
446 restart_command = argv[0];
|
|
|
447
|
|
|
448 if (strchr(argv[0], G_DIR_SEPARATOR) != NULL)
|
|
|
449 {
|
|
|
450 char_u buf[MAXPATHL];
|
|
|
451
|
|
|
452 if (mch_FullName((char_u *)argv[0], buf, (int)sizeof(buf), TRUE) == OK)
|
|
1898
|
453 {
|
|
|
454 abs_restart_command = (char *)vim_strsave(buf);
|
|
|
455 restart_command = abs_restart_command;
|
|
|
456 }
|
|
7
|
457 }
|
|
|
458 #endif
|
|
|
459
|
|
|
460 /*
|
|
|
461 * Move all the entries in argv which are relevant to GTK+ and GNOME
|
|
|
462 * into gui_argv. Freed later in gui_mch_init().
|
|
|
463 */
|
|
|
464 gui_argc = 0;
|
|
|
465 gui_argv = (char **)alloc((unsigned)((*argc + 1) * sizeof(char *)));
|
|
|
466
|
|
|
467 g_return_if_fail(gui_argv != NULL);
|
|
|
468
|
|
|
469 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i++];
|
|
|
470
|
|
|
471 while (i < *argc)
|
|
|
472 {
|
|
|
473 /* Don't waste CPU cycles on non-option arguments. */
|
|
|
474 if (argv[i][0] != '-' && argv[i][0] != '+')
|
|
|
475 {
|
|
|
476 ++i;
|
|
|
477 continue;
|
|
|
478 }
|
|
|
479
|
|
|
480 /* Look for argv[i] in cmdline_options[] table. */
|
|
|
481 for (option = &cmdline_options[0]; option->name != NULL; ++option)
|
|
|
482 {
|
|
|
483 len = strlen(option->name);
|
|
|
484
|
|
|
485 if (strncmp(argv[i], option->name, len) == 0)
|
|
|
486 {
|
|
|
487 if (argv[i][len] == '\0')
|
|
|
488 break;
|
|
|
489 /* allow --foo=bar style */
|
|
|
490 if (argv[i][len] == '=' && (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE))
|
|
|
491 break;
|
|
|
492 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
|
|
|
493 /* darn, -nb has non-standard syntax */
|
|
|
494 if (vim_strchr((char_u *)":=", argv[i][len]) != NULL
|
|
|
495 && (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK) == ARG_NETBEANS)
|
|
|
496 break;
|
|
|
497 #endif
|
|
|
498 }
|
|
|
499 else if ((option->flags & ARG_COMPAT_LONG)
|
|
|
500 && strcmp(argv[i], option->name + 1) == 0)
|
|
|
501 {
|
|
|
502 /* Replace the standard X arguments "-name" and "-display"
|
|
|
503 * with their GNU-style long option counterparts. */
|
|
|
504 argv[i] = (char *)option->name;
|
|
|
505 break;
|
|
|
506 }
|
|
|
507 }
|
|
|
508 if (option->name == NULL) /* no match */
|
|
|
509 {
|
|
|
510 ++i;
|
|
|
511 continue;
|
|
|
512 }
|
|
|
513
|
|
|
514 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK)
|
|
|
515 {
|
|
|
516 /* Move the argument into gui_argv, which
|
|
|
517 * will later be passed to gtk_init_check() */
|
|
|
518 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i];
|
|
|
519 }
|
|
|
520 else
|
|
|
521 {
|
|
|
522 char *value = NULL;
|
|
|
523
|
|
|
524 /* Extract the option's value if there is one.
|
|
|
525 * Accept both "--foo bar" and "--foo=bar" style. */
|
|
|
526 if (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE)
|
|
|
527 {
|
|
|
528 if (argv[i][len] == '=')
|
|
|
529 value = &argv[i][len + 1];
|
|
|
530 else if (i + 1 < *argc && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0)
|
|
|
531 value = argv[i + 1];
|
|
|
532 }
|
|
|
533
|
|
|
534 /* Check for options handled by Vim itself */
|
|
|
535 switch (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK)
|
|
|
536 {
|
|
|
537 case ARG_REVERSE:
|
|
|
538 found_reverse_arg = TRUE;
|
|
|
539 break;
|
|
|
540 case ARG_NOREVERSE:
|
|
|
541 found_reverse_arg = FALSE;
|
|
|
542 break;
|
|
|
543 case ARG_FONT:
|
|
|
544 font_argument = value;
|
|
|
545 break;
|
|
|
546 case ARG_GEOMETRY:
|
|
|
547 if (value != NULL)
|
|
|
548 gui.geom = vim_strsave((char_u *)value);
|
|
|
549 break;
|
|
|
550 case ARG_BACKGROUND:
|
|
|
551 background_argument = value;
|
|
|
552 break;
|
|
|
553 case ARG_FOREGROUND:
|
|
|
554 foreground_argument = value;
|
|
|
555 break;
|
|
|
556 case ARG_ICONIC:
|
|
|
557 found_iconic_arg = TRUE;
|
|
|
558 break;
|
|
|
559 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
560 case ARG_ROLE:
|
|
|
561 role_argument = value; /* used later in gui_mch_open() */
|
|
|
562 break;
|
|
|
563 #endif
|
|
|
564 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
|
|
|
565 case ARG_NETBEANS:
|
|
|
566 ++usingNetbeans;
|
|
|
567 gui.dofork = FALSE; /* don't fork() when starting GUI */
|
|
|
568 netbeansArg = argv[i];
|
|
|
569 break;
|
|
|
570 #endif
|
|
|
571 default:
|
|
|
572 break;
|
|
|
573 }
|
|
|
574 }
|
|
|
575
|
|
|
576 /* These arguments make gnome_program_init() print a message and exit.
|
|
|
577 * Must start the GUI for this, otherwise ":gui" will exit later! */
|
|
|
578 if (option->flags & ARG_NEEDS_GUI)
|
|
|
579 gui.starting = TRUE;
|
|
|
580
|
|
|
581 if (option->flags & ARG_KEEP)
|
|
|
582 ++i;
|
|
|
583 else
|
|
|
584 {
|
|
|
585 /* Remove the flag from the argument vector. */
|
|
|
586 if (--*argc > i)
|
|
|
587 {
|
|
|
588 int n_strip = 1;
|
|
|
589
|
|
|
590 /* Move the argument's value as well, if there is one. */
|
|
|
591 if ((option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE)
|
|
|
592 && argv[i][len] != '='
|
|
|
593 && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0)
|
|
|
594 {
|
|
|
595 ++n_strip;
|
|
|
596 --*argc;
|
|
|
597 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK)
|
|
|
598 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i + 1];
|
|
|
599 }
|
|
|
600
|
|
|
601 if (*argc > i)
|
|
|
602 mch_memmove(&argv[i], &argv[i + n_strip],
|
|
|
603 (*argc - i) * sizeof(char *));
|
|
|
604 }
|
|
|
605 argv[*argc] = NULL;
|
|
|
606 }
|
|
|
607 }
|
|
|
608
|
|
|
609 gui_argv[gui_argc] = NULL;
|
|
|
610 }
|
|
|
611
|
|
359
|
612 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
613 void
|
|
|
614 gui_mch_free_all()
|
|
|
615 {
|
|
|
616 vim_free(gui_argv);
|
|
1898
|
617 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
618 vim_free(abs_restart_command);
|
|
|
619 #endif
|
|
359
|
620 }
|
|
|
621 #endif
|
|
|
622
|
|
7
|
623 /*
|
|
|
624 * This should be maybe completely removed.
|
|
|
625 * Doesn't seem possible, since check_copy_area() relies on
|
|
|
626 * this information. --danielk
|
|
|
627 */
|
|
|
628 static gint
|
|
1884
|
629 visibility_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
|
630 GdkEventVisibility *event,
|
|
|
631 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
632 {
|
|
|
633 gui.visibility = event->state;
|
|
|
634 /*
|
|
|
635 * When we do an gdk_window_copy_area(), and the window is partially
|
|
|
636 * obscured, we want to receive an event to tell us whether it worked
|
|
|
637 * or not.
|
|
|
638 */
|
|
|
639 if (gui.text_gc != NULL)
|
|
|
640 gdk_gc_set_exposures(gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
641 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED);
|
|
|
642 return FALSE;
|
|
|
643 }
|
|
|
644
|
|
|
645 /*
|
|
|
646 * Redraw the corresponding portions of the screen.
|
|
|
647 */
|
|
|
648 static gint
|
|
1884
|
649 expose_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
|
650 GdkEventExpose *event,
|
|
|
651 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
652 {
|
|
|
653 /* Skip this when the GUI isn't set up yet, will redraw later. */
|
|
|
654 if (gui.starting)
|
|
|
655 return FALSE;
|
|
|
656
|
|
|
657 out_flush(); /* make sure all output has been processed */
|
|
|
658 gui_redraw(event->area.x, event->area.y,
|
|
|
659 event->area.width, event->area.height);
|
|
|
660
|
|
|
661 /* Clear the border areas if needed */
|
|
|
662 if (event->area.x < FILL_X(0))
|
|
|
663 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, FILL_X(0), 0);
|
|
|
664 if (event->area.y < FILL_Y(0))
|
|
|
665 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, 0, FILL_Y(0));
|
|
|
666 if (event->area.x > FILL_X(Columns))
|
|
|
667 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
668 FILL_X((int)Columns), 0, 0, 0);
|
|
|
669 if (event->area.y > FILL_Y(Rows))
|
|
|
670 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, FILL_Y((int)Rows), 0, 0);
|
|
|
671
|
|
|
672 return FALSE;
|
|
|
673 }
|
|
|
674
|
|
|
675 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER
|
|
|
676 /*
|
|
|
677 * Handle changes to the "Comm" property
|
|
|
678 */
|
|
|
679 static gint
|
|
1884
|
680 property_event(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
681 GdkEventProperty *event,
|
|
|
682 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
683 {
|
|
|
684 if (event->type == GDK_PROPERTY_NOTIFY
|
|
|
685 && event->state == (int)GDK_PROPERTY_NEW_VALUE
|
|
|
686 && GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(event->window) == commWindow
|
|
|
687 && GET_X_ATOM(event->atom) == commProperty)
|
|
|
688 {
|
|
|
689 XEvent xev;
|
|
|
690
|
|
|
691 /* Translate to XLib */
|
|
|
692 xev.xproperty.type = PropertyNotify;
|
|
|
693 xev.xproperty.atom = commProperty;
|
|
|
694 xev.xproperty.window = commWindow;
|
|
|
695 xev.xproperty.state = PropertyNewValue;
|
|
|
696 serverEventProc(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(widget->window), &xev);
|
|
|
697
|
|
|
698 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
699 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
700 }
|
|
|
701 return FALSE;
|
|
|
702 }
|
|
|
703 #endif
|
|
|
704
|
|
|
705
|
|
|
706 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
707 * Focus handlers:
|
|
|
708 */
|
|
|
709
|
|
|
710
|
|
|
711 /*
|
|
|
712 * This is a simple state machine:
|
|
|
713 * BLINK_NONE not blinking at all
|
|
|
714 * BLINK_OFF blinking, cursor is not shown
|
|
|
715 * BLINK_ON blinking, cursor is shown
|
|
|
716 */
|
|
|
717
|
|
|
718 #define BLINK_NONE 0
|
|
|
719 #define BLINK_OFF 1
|
|
|
720 #define BLINK_ON 2
|
|
|
721
|
|
|
722 static int blink_state = BLINK_NONE;
|
|
|
723 static long_u blink_waittime = 700;
|
|
|
724 static long_u blink_ontime = 400;
|
|
|
725 static long_u blink_offtime = 250;
|
|
|
726 static guint blink_timer = 0;
|
|
|
727
|
|
|
728 void
|
|
|
729 gui_mch_set_blinking(long waittime, long on, long off)
|
|
|
730 {
|
|
|
731 blink_waittime = waittime;
|
|
|
732 blink_ontime = on;
|
|
|
733 blink_offtime = off;
|
|
|
734 }
|
|
|
735
|
|
|
736 /*
|
|
|
737 * Stop the cursor blinking. Show the cursor if it wasn't shown.
|
|
|
738 */
|
|
|
739 void
|
|
|
740 gui_mch_stop_blink(void)
|
|
|
741 {
|
|
|
742 if (blink_timer)
|
|
|
743 {
|
|
|
744 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer);
|
|
|
745 blink_timer = 0;
|
|
|
746 }
|
|
|
747 if (blink_state == BLINK_OFF)
|
|
|
748 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE);
|
|
|
749 blink_state = BLINK_NONE;
|
|
|
750 }
|
|
|
751
|
|
|
752 static gint
|
|
1884
|
753 blink_cb(gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
754 {
|
|
|
755 if (blink_state == BLINK_ON)
|
|
|
756 {
|
|
|
757 gui_undraw_cursor();
|
|
|
758 blink_state = BLINK_OFF;
|
|
|
759 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_offtime,
|
|
|
760 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
761 }
|
|
|
762 else
|
|
|
763 {
|
|
|
764 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE);
|
|
|
765 blink_state = BLINK_ON;
|
|
|
766 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_ontime,
|
|
|
767 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
768 }
|
|
|
769
|
|
|
770 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */
|
|
|
771 }
|
|
|
772
|
|
|
773 /*
|
|
|
774 * Start the cursor blinking. If it was already blinking, this restarts the
|
|
|
775 * waiting time and shows the cursor.
|
|
|
776 */
|
|
|
777 void
|
|
|
778 gui_mch_start_blink(void)
|
|
|
779 {
|
|
|
780 if (blink_timer)
|
|
|
781 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer);
|
|
|
782 /* Only switch blinking on if none of the times is zero */
|
|
|
783 if (blink_waittime && blink_ontime && blink_offtime && gui.in_focus)
|
|
|
784 {
|
|
|
785 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_waittime,
|
|
|
786 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
787 blink_state = BLINK_ON;
|
|
|
788 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE);
|
|
|
789 }
|
|
|
790 }
|
|
|
791
|
|
|
792 static gint
|
|
1884
|
793 enter_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
|
794 GdkEventCrossing *event UNUSED,
|
|
|
795 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
796 {
|
|
|
797 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
798 gui_mch_start_blink();
|
|
|
799
|
|
|
800 /* make sure keyboard input goes there */
|
|
|
801 if (gtk_socket_id == 0 || !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(gui.drawarea))
|
|
|
802 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea);
|
|
|
803
|
|
|
804 return FALSE;
|
|
|
805 }
|
|
|
806
|
|
|
807 static gint
|
|
1884
|
808 leave_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
|
809 GdkEventCrossing *event UNUSED,
|
|
|
810 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
811 {
|
|
|
812 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
813 gui_mch_stop_blink();
|
|
|
814
|
|
|
815 return FALSE;
|
|
|
816 }
|
|
|
817
|
|
|
818 static gint
|
|
1884
|
819 focus_in_event(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
820 GdkEventFocus *event UNUSED,
|
|
|
821 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
822 {
|
|
|
823 gui_focus_change(TRUE);
|
|
|
824
|
|
|
825 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
826 gui_mch_start_blink();
|
|
|
827
|
|
1380
|
828 /* make sure keyboard input goes to the draw area (if this is focus for a
|
|
|
829 * window) */
|
|
791
|
830 if (widget != gui.drawarea)
|
|
856
|
831 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea);
|
|
7
|
832
|
|
1380
|
833 /* make sure the input buffer is read */
|
|
|
834 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
835 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
836
|
|
7
|
837 return TRUE;
|
|
|
838 }
|
|
|
839
|
|
|
840 static gint
|
|
1884
|
841 focus_out_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
|
842 GdkEventFocus *event UNUSED,
|
|
|
843 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
844 {
|
|
|
845 gui_focus_change(FALSE);
|
|
|
846
|
|
|
847 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
848 gui_mch_stop_blink();
|
|
|
849
|
|
1380
|
850 /* make sure the input buffer is read */
|
|
|
851 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
852 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
853
|
|
7
|
854 return TRUE;
|
|
|
855 }
|
|
|
856
|
|
|
857
|
|
|
858 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
859 /*
|
|
|
860 * Translate a GDK key value to UTF-8 independently of the current locale.
|
|
|
861 * The output is written to string, which must have room for at least 6 bytes
|
|
|
862 * plus the NUL terminator. Returns the length in bytes.
|
|
|
863 *
|
|
|
864 * This function is used in the GTK+ 2 GUI only. The GTK+ 1 code makes use
|
|
|
865 * of GdkEventKey::string instead. But event->string is evil; see here why:
|
|
|
866 * http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gdk/gdk-Event-Structures.html#GdkEventKey
|
|
|
867 */
|
|
|
868 static int
|
|
|
869 keyval_to_string(unsigned int keyval, unsigned int state, char_u *string)
|
|
|
870 {
|
|
|
871 int len;
|
|
|
872 guint32 uc;
|
|
|
873
|
|
|
874 uc = gdk_keyval_to_unicode(keyval);
|
|
|
875 if (uc != 0)
|
|
|
876 {
|
|
|
877 /* Check for CTRL-foo */
|
|
|
878 if ((state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) && uc >= 0x20 && uc < 0x80)
|
|
|
879 {
|
|
|
880 /* These mappings look arbitrary at the first glance, but in fact
|
|
|
881 * resemble quite exactly the behaviour of the GTK+ 1.2 GUI on my
|
|
|
882 * machine. The only difference is BS vs. DEL for CTRL-8 (makes
|
|
|
883 * more sense and is consistent with usual terminal behaviour). */
|
|
|
884 if (uc >= '@')
|
|
|
885 string[0] = uc & 0x1F;
|
|
|
886 else if (uc == '2')
|
|
|
887 string[0] = NUL;
|
|
|
888 else if (uc >= '3' && uc <= '7')
|
|
|
889 string[0] = uc ^ 0x28;
|
|
|
890 else if (uc == '8')
|
|
|
891 string[0] = BS;
|
|
|
892 else if (uc == '?')
|
|
|
893 string[0] = DEL;
|
|
|
894 else
|
|
|
895 string[0] = uc;
|
|
|
896 len = 1;
|
|
|
897 }
|
|
|
898 else
|
|
|
899 {
|
|
|
900 /* Translate a normal key to UTF-8. This doesn't work for dead
|
|
|
901 * keys of course, you _have_ to use an input method for that. */
|
|
|
902 len = utf_char2bytes((int)uc, string);
|
|
|
903 }
|
|
|
904 }
|
|
|
905 else
|
|
|
906 {
|
|
|
907 /* Translate keys which are represented by ASCII control codes in Vim.
|
|
|
908 * There are only a few of those; most control keys are translated to
|
|
|
909 * special terminal-like control sequences. */
|
|
|
910 len = 1;
|
|
|
911 switch (keyval)
|
|
|
912 {
|
|
|
913 case GDK_Tab: case GDK_KP_Tab: case GDK_ISO_Left_Tab:
|
|
|
914 string[0] = TAB;
|
|
|
915 break;
|
|
|
916 case GDK_Linefeed:
|
|
|
917 string[0] = NL;
|
|
|
918 break;
|
|
|
919 case GDK_Return: case GDK_ISO_Enter: case GDK_3270_Enter:
|
|
|
920 string[0] = CAR;
|
|
|
921 break;
|
|
|
922 case GDK_Escape:
|
|
|
923 string[0] = ESC;
|
|
|
924 break;
|
|
|
925 default:
|
|
|
926 len = 0;
|
|
|
927 break;
|
|
|
928 }
|
|
|
929 }
|
|
|
930 string[len] = NUL;
|
|
|
931
|
|
|
932 return len;
|
|
|
933 }
|
|
|
934 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
935
|
|
179
|
936 static int
|
|
|
937 modifiers_gdk2vim(guint state)
|
|
|
938 {
|
|
|
939 int modifiers = 0;
|
|
|
940
|
|
|
941 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
|
|
|
942 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_SHIFT;
|
|
|
943 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
|
|
|
944 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_CTRL;
|
|
|
945 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
946 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_ALT;
|
|
|
947 if (state & GDK_MOD4_MASK)
|
|
|
948 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_META;
|
|
|
949
|
|
|
950 return modifiers;
|
|
|
951 }
|
|
|
952
|
|
|
953 static int
|
|
|
954 modifiers_gdk2mouse(guint state)
|
|
|
955 {
|
|
|
956 int modifiers = 0;
|
|
|
957
|
|
|
958 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
|
|
|
959 modifiers |= MOUSE_SHIFT;
|
|
|
960 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
|
|
|
961 modifiers |= MOUSE_CTRL;
|
|
|
962 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
963 modifiers |= MOUSE_ALT;
|
|
|
964
|
|
|
965 return modifiers;
|
|
|
966 }
|
|
|
967
|
|
7
|
968 /*
|
|
|
969 * Main keyboard handler:
|
|
|
970 */
|
|
|
971 static gint
|
|
1884
|
972 key_press_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
|
973 GdkEventKey *event,
|
|
|
974 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
975 {
|
|
|
976 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
977 /* 256 bytes is way over the top, but for safety let's reduce it only
|
|
|
978 * for GTK+ 2 where we know for sure how large the string might get.
|
|
|
979 * (That is, up to 6 bytes + NUL + CSI escapes + safety measure.) */
|
|
|
980 char_u string[32], string2[32];
|
|
|
981 #else
|
|
|
982 char_u string[256], string2[256];
|
|
|
983 #endif
|
|
|
984 guint key_sym;
|
|
|
985 int len;
|
|
|
986 int i;
|
|
|
987 int modifiers;
|
|
|
988 int key;
|
|
|
989 guint state;
|
|
|
990 char_u *s, *d;
|
|
|
991
|
|
|
992 key_sym = event->keyval;
|
|
|
993 state = event->state;
|
|
|
994 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* deprecated */
|
|
|
995 len = event->length;
|
|
|
996 g_assert(len <= sizeof(string));
|
|
|
997 #endif
|
|
|
998
|
|
|
999 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1000 /*
|
|
|
1001 * It appears as if we always want to consume a key-press (there currently
|
|
|
1002 * aren't any 'return FALSE's), so we always do this: when running in a
|
|
|
1003 * GtkPlug and not a window, we must prevent emission of the key_press
|
|
|
1004 * EVENT from continuing (which is 'beyond' the level of stopping mere
|
|
|
1005 * signals by returning FALSE), otherwise things like tab/cursor-keys are
|
|
|
1006 * processed by the GtkPlug default handler, which moves input focus away
|
|
|
1007 * from us!
|
|
|
1008 * Note: This should no longer be necessary with GTK+ 2.
|
|
|
1009 */
|
|
|
1010 if (gtk_socket_id != 0)
|
|
|
1011 gtk_signal_emit_stop_by_name(GTK_OBJECT(widget), "key_press_event");
|
|
|
1012 #endif
|
|
|
1013
|
|
|
1014 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
1015 if (xim_queue_key_press_event(event, TRUE))
|
|
|
1016 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1017 #endif
|
|
|
1018
|
|
|
1019 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN
|
|
|
1020 if (key_sym == GDK_space && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK))
|
|
|
1021 {
|
|
|
1022 hangul_input_state_toggle();
|
|
|
1023 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1024 }
|
|
|
1025 #endif
|
|
|
1026
|
|
|
1027 #ifdef SunXK_F36
|
|
|
1028 /*
|
|
|
1029 * These keys have bogus lookup strings, and trapping them here is
|
|
|
1030 * easier than trying to XRebindKeysym() on them with every possible
|
|
|
1031 * combination of modifiers.
|
|
|
1032 */
|
|
|
1033 if (key_sym == SunXK_F36 || key_sym == SunXK_F37)
|
|
|
1034 len = 0;
|
|
|
1035 else
|
|
|
1036 #endif
|
|
|
1037 {
|
|
|
1038 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1039 len = keyval_to_string(key_sym, state, string2);
|
|
|
1040
|
|
|
1041 /* Careful: convert_input() doesn't handle the NUL character.
|
|
|
1042 * No need to convert pure ASCII anyway, thus the len > 1 check. */
|
|
|
1043 if (len > 1 && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1044 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2));
|
|
|
1045
|
|
|
1046 s = string2;
|
|
|
1047 #else
|
|
|
1048 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1049 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1050 {
|
|
|
1051 mch_memmove(string2, event->string, len);
|
|
|
1052 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2));
|
|
|
1053 s = string2;
|
|
|
1054 }
|
|
|
1055 else
|
|
|
1056 # endif
|
|
|
1057 s = (char_u *)event->string;
|
|
|
1058 #endif
|
|
|
1059
|
|
|
1060 d = string;
|
|
|
1061 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
|
|
|
1062 {
|
|
|
1063 *d++ = s[i];
|
|
|
1064 if (d[-1] == CSI && d + 2 < string + sizeof(string))
|
|
|
1065 {
|
|
|
1066 /* Turn CSI into K_CSI. */
|
|
|
1067 *d++ = KS_EXTRA;
|
|
|
1068 *d++ = (int)KE_CSI;
|
|
|
1069 }
|
|
|
1070 }
|
|
|
1071 len = d - string;
|
|
|
1072 }
|
|
|
1073
|
|
|
1074 /* Shift-Tab results in Left_Tab, but we want <S-Tab> */
|
|
|
1075 if (key_sym == GDK_ISO_Left_Tab)
|
|
|
1076 {
|
|
|
1077 key_sym = GDK_Tab;
|
|
|
1078 state |= GDK_SHIFT_MASK;
|
|
|
1079 }
|
|
|
1080
|
|
|
1081 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* for GTK+ 2, we handle this in keyval_to_string() */
|
|
|
1082 if ((key_sym == GDK_2 || key_sym == GDK_at) && (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK))
|
|
|
1083 {
|
|
|
1084 string[0] = NUL; /* CTRL-2 and CTRL-@ is NUL */
|
|
|
1085 len = 1;
|
|
|
1086 }
|
|
|
1087 else if (len == 0 && (key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab))
|
|
|
1088 {
|
|
|
1089 /* When there are modifiers, these keys get zero length; we need the
|
|
|
1090 * original key here to be able to add a modifier below. */
|
|
|
1091 string[0] = (key_sym & 0xff);
|
|
|
1092 len = 1;
|
|
|
1093 }
|
|
|
1094 #endif
|
|
|
1095
|
|
|
1096 #ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
1097 /* If there is a menu and 'wak' is "yes", or 'wak' is "menu" and the key
|
|
|
1098 * is a menu shortcut, we ignore everything with the ALT modifier. */
|
|
|
1099 if ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
1100 && gui.menu_is_active
|
|
|
1101 && (*p_wak == 'y'
|
|
|
1102 || (*p_wak == 'm'
|
|
|
1103 && len == 1
|
|
|
1104 && gui_is_menu_shortcut(string[0]))))
|
|
|
1105 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1106 /* For GTK2 we return false to signify that we haven't handled the
|
|
|
1107 * keypress, so that gtk will handle the mnemonic or accelerator. */
|
|
|
1108 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1109 # else
|
|
|
1110 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1111 # endif
|
|
|
1112 #endif
|
|
|
1113
|
|
|
1114 /* Check for Alt/Meta key (Mod1Mask), but not for a BS, DEL or character
|
|
|
1115 * that already has the 8th bit set.
|
|
|
1116 * Don't do this for <S-M-Tab>, that should become K_S_TAB with ALT.
|
|
|
1117 * Don't do this for double-byte encodings, it turns the char into a lead
|
|
|
1118 * byte. */
|
|
|
1119 if (len == 1
|
|
|
1120 && (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
1121 && !(key_sym == GDK_BackSpace || key_sym == GDK_Delete)
|
|
|
1122 && (string[0] & 0x80) == 0
|
|
|
1123 && !(key_sym == GDK_Tab && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK))
|
|
|
1124 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1125 && !enc_dbcs
|
|
|
1126 #endif
|
|
|
1127 )
|
|
|
1128 {
|
|
|
1129 string[0] |= 0x80;
|
|
|
1130 state &= ~GDK_MOD1_MASK; /* don't use it again */
|
|
|
1131 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1132 if (enc_utf8) /* convert to utf-8 */
|
|
|
1133 {
|
|
|
1134 string[1] = string[0] & 0xbf;
|
|
|
1135 string[0] = ((unsigned)string[0] >> 6) + 0xc0;
|
|
|
1136 if (string[1] == CSI)
|
|
|
1137 {
|
|
|
1138 string[2] = KS_EXTRA;
|
|
|
1139 string[3] = (int)KE_CSI;
|
|
|
1140 len = 4;
|
|
|
1141 }
|
|
|
1142 else
|
|
|
1143 len = 2;
|
|
|
1144 }
|
|
|
1145 #endif
|
|
|
1146 }
|
|
|
1147
|
|
|
1148 /* Check for special keys. Also do this when len == 1 (key has an ASCII
|
|
|
1149 * value) to detect backspace, delete and keypad keys. */
|
|
|
1150 if (len == 0 || len == 1)
|
|
|
1151 {
|
|
|
1152 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++)
|
|
|
1153 {
|
|
|
1154 if (special_keys[i].key_sym == key_sym)
|
|
|
1155 {
|
|
|
1156 string[0] = CSI;
|
|
|
1157 string[1] = special_keys[i].code0;
|
|
|
1158 string[2] = special_keys[i].code1;
|
|
|
1159 len = -3;
|
|
|
1160 break;
|
|
|
1161 }
|
|
|
1162 }
|
|
|
1163 }
|
|
|
1164
|
|
|
1165 if (len == 0) /* Unrecognized key */
|
|
|
1166 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1167
|
|
|
1168 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && !defined(HAVE_GTK2)
|
|
|
1169 /* Cancel or type backspace. For GTK2, im_commit_cb() does the same. */
|
|
|
1170 preedit_start_col = MAXCOL;
|
|
|
1171 xim_changed_while_preediting = TRUE;
|
|
|
1172 #endif
|
|
|
1173
|
|
|
1174 /* Special keys (and a few others) may have modifiers. Also when using a
|
|
|
1175 * double-byte encoding (can't set the 8th bit). */
|
|
|
1176 if (len == -3 || key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab
|
|
|
1177 || key_sym == GDK_Return || key_sym == GDK_Linefeed
|
|
|
1178 || key_sym == GDK_Escape || key_sym == GDK_KP_Tab
|
|
|
1179 || key_sym == GDK_ISO_Enter || key_sym == GDK_3270_Enter
|
|
|
1180 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1181 || (enc_dbcs && len == 1 && (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK))
|
|
|
1182 #endif
|
|
|
1183 )
|
|
|
1184 {
|
|
179
|
1185 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2vim(state);
|
|
7
|
1186
|
|
|
1187 /*
|
|
|
1188 * For some keys a shift modifier is translated into another key
|
|
|
1189 * code.
|
|
|
1190 */
|
|
|
1191 if (len == -3)
|
|
|
1192 key = TO_SPECIAL(string[1], string[2]);
|
|
|
1193 else
|
|
|
1194 key = string[0];
|
|
|
1195
|
|
|
1196 key = simplify_key(key, &modifiers);
|
|
|
1197 if (key == CSI)
|
|
|
1198 key = K_CSI;
|
|
|
1199 if (IS_SPECIAL(key))
|
|
|
1200 {
|
|
|
1201 string[0] = CSI;
|
|
|
1202 string[1] = K_SECOND(key);
|
|
|
1203 string[2] = K_THIRD(key);
|
|
|
1204 len = 3;
|
|
|
1205 }
|
|
|
1206 else
|
|
|
1207 {
|
|
|
1208 string[0] = key;
|
|
|
1209 len = 1;
|
|
|
1210 }
|
|
|
1211
|
|
|
1212 if (modifiers != 0)
|
|
|
1213 {
|
|
|
1214 string2[0] = CSI;
|
|
|
1215 string2[1] = KS_MODIFIER;
|
|
|
1216 string2[2] = modifiers;
|
|
|
1217 add_to_input_buf(string2, 3);
|
|
|
1218 }
|
|
|
1219 }
|
|
|
1220
|
|
|
1221 if (len == 1 && ((string[0] == Ctrl_C && ctrl_c_interrupts)
|
|
|
1222 || (string[0] == intr_char && intr_char != Ctrl_C)))
|
|
|
1223 {
|
|
|
1224 trash_input_buf();
|
|
|
1225 got_int = TRUE;
|
|
|
1226 }
|
|
|
1227
|
|
|
1228 add_to_input_buf(string, len);
|
|
|
1229
|
|
|
1230 /* blank out the pointer if necessary */
|
|
|
1231 if (p_mh)
|
|
|
1232 gui_mch_mousehide(TRUE);
|
|
|
1233
|
|
|
1234 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1235 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1236
|
|
|
1237 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1238 }
|
|
|
1239
|
|
|
1240 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(HAVE_GTK2)
|
|
|
1241 static gboolean
|
|
1884
|
1242 key_release_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
|
1243 GdkEventKey *event,
|
|
|
1244 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
1245 {
|
|
|
1246 /*
|
|
|
1247 * GTK+ 2 input methods may do fancy stuff on key release events too.
|
|
|
1248 * With the default IM for instance, you can enter any UCS code point
|
|
|
1249 * by holding down CTRL-SHIFT and typing hexadecimal digits.
|
|
|
1250 */
|
|
|
1251 return xim_queue_key_press_event(event, FALSE);
|
|
|
1252 }
|
|
|
1253 #endif
|
|
|
1254
|
|
|
1255
|
|
|
1256 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
1257 * Selection handlers:
|
|
|
1258 */
|
|
|
1259
|
|
|
1260 static gint
|
|
1884
|
1261 selection_clear_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
7
|
1262 GdkEventSelection *event,
|
|
1884
|
1263 gpointer user_data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
1264 {
|
|
|
1265 if (event->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom)
|
|
|
1266 clip_lose_selection(&clip_plus);
|
|
|
1267 else
|
|
|
1268 clip_lose_selection(&clip_star);
|
|
|
1269
|
|
|
1270 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1271 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1272
|
|
|
1273 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1274 }
|
|
|
1275
|
|
|
1276 #define RS_NONE 0 /* selection_received_cb() not called yet */
|
|
|
1277 #define RS_OK 1 /* selection_received_cb() called and OK */
|
|
|
1278 #define RS_FAIL 2 /* selection_received_cb() called and failed */
|
|
|
1279 static int received_selection = RS_NONE;
|
|
|
1280
|
|
|
1281 static void
|
|
1884
|
1282 selection_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
7
|
1283 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
1884
|
1284 guint time_ UNUSED,
|
|
|
1285 gpointer user_data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
1286 {
|
|
|
1287 VimClipboard *cbd;
|
|
|
1288 char_u *text;
|
|
|
1289 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL;
|
|
|
1290 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1291 guchar *tmpbuf_utf8 = NULL;
|
|
|
1292 #endif
|
|
|
1293 int len;
|
|
|
1294 int motion_type;
|
|
|
1295
|
|
|
1296 if (data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom)
|
|
|
1297 cbd = &clip_plus;
|
|
|
1298 else
|
|
|
1299 cbd = &clip_star;
|
|
|
1300
|
|
|
1301 text = (char_u *)data->data;
|
|
|
1302 len = data->length;
|
|
|
1303 motion_type = MCHAR;
|
|
|
1304
|
|
|
1305 if (text == NULL || len <= 0)
|
|
|
1306 {
|
|
|
1307 received_selection = RS_FAIL;
|
|
|
1308 /* clip_free_selection(cbd); ??? */
|
|
|
1309
|
|
|
1310 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1311 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1312
|
|
|
1313 return;
|
|
|
1314 }
|
|
|
1315
|
|
|
1316 if (data->type == vim_atom)
|
|
|
1317 {
|
|
|
1318 motion_type = *text++;
|
|
|
1319 --len;
|
|
|
1320 }
|
|
|
1321
|
|
|
1322 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1323 else if (data->type == vimenc_atom)
|
|
|
1324 {
|
|
|
1325 char_u *enc;
|
|
|
1326 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
1327
|
|
|
1328 motion_type = *text++;
|
|
|
1329 --len;
|
|
|
1330
|
|
|
1331 enc = text;
|
|
|
1332 text += STRLEN(text) + 1;
|
|
|
1333 len -= text - enc;
|
|
|
1334
|
|
|
1335 /* If the encoding of the text is different from 'encoding', attempt
|
|
|
1336 * converting it. */
|
|
|
1337 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
1338 convert_setup(&conv, enc, p_enc);
|
|
|
1339 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1340 {
|
|
|
1341 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
1342 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1343 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1344 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
1345 }
|
|
|
1346 }
|
|
|
1347 #endif
|
|
|
1348
|
|
|
1349 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1350 /* gtk_selection_data_get_text() handles all the nasty details
|
|
|
1351 * and targets and encodings etc. This rocks so hard. */
|
|
|
1352 else
|
|
|
1353 {
|
|
|
1354 tmpbuf_utf8 = gtk_selection_data_get_text(data);
|
|
|
1355 if (tmpbuf_utf8 != NULL)
|
|
|
1356 {
|
|
|
1357 len = STRLEN(tmpbuf_utf8);
|
|
|
1358 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1359 {
|
|
|
1360 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, tmpbuf_utf8, &len);
|
|
|
1361 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1362 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1363 }
|
|
|
1364 else
|
|
|
1365 text = tmpbuf_utf8;
|
|
|
1366 }
|
|
|
1367 }
|
|
|
1368 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1369 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1370 else if (data->type == utf8_string_atom)
|
|
|
1371 {
|
|
|
1372 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
1373
|
|
|
1374 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
1375 convert_setup(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-8", p_enc);
|
|
|
1376
|
|
|
1377 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1378 {
|
|
|
1379 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
1380 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
1381 }
|
|
|
1382 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1383 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1384 }
|
|
|
1385 # endif
|
|
|
1386 else if (data->type == compound_text_atom || data->type == text_atom)
|
|
|
1387 {
|
|
|
1388 char **list = NULL;
|
|
|
1389 int count;
|
|
|
1390 int i;
|
|
|
1391 unsigned tmplen = 0;
|
|
|
1392
|
|
|
1393 count = gdk_text_property_to_text_list(data->type, data->format,
|
|
|
1394 data->data, data->length,
|
|
|
1395 &list);
|
|
|
1396 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
|
|
|
1397 tmplen += strlen(list[i]);
|
|
|
1398
|
|
|
1399 tmpbuf = alloc(tmplen + 1);
|
|
|
1400 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1401 {
|
|
|
1402 tmpbuf[0] = NUL;
|
|
|
1403 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
|
|
|
1404 STRCAT(tmpbuf, list[i]);
|
|
|
1405 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1406 len = tmplen;
|
|
|
1407 }
|
|
|
1408
|
|
|
1409 if (list != NULL)
|
|
|
1410 gdk_free_text_list(list);
|
|
|
1411 }
|
|
|
1412 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1413
|
|
|
1414 clip_yank_selection(motion_type, text, (long)len, cbd);
|
|
|
1415 received_selection = RS_OK;
|
|
|
1416 vim_free(tmpbuf);
|
|
|
1417 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1418 g_free(tmpbuf_utf8);
|
|
|
1419 #endif
|
|
|
1420
|
|
|
1421 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1422 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1423 }
|
|
|
1424
|
|
|
1425 /*
|
|
|
1426 * Prepare our selection data for passing it to the external selection
|
|
|
1427 * client.
|
|
|
1428 */
|
|
|
1429 static void
|
|
1884
|
1430 selection_get_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
7
|
1431 GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
|
|
|
1432 guint info,
|
|
1884
|
1433 guint time_ UNUSED,
|
|
|
1434 gpointer user_data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
1435 {
|
|
|
1436 char_u *string;
|
|
|
1437 char_u *tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1438 long_u tmplen;
|
|
|
1439 int length;
|
|
|
1440 int motion_type;
|
|
|
1441 GdkAtom type;
|
|
|
1442 VimClipboard *cbd;
|
|
|
1443
|
|
|
1444 if (selection_data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom)
|
|
|
1445 cbd = &clip_plus;
|
|
|
1446 else
|
|
|
1447 cbd = &clip_star;
|
|
|
1448
|
|
|
1449 if (!cbd->owned)
|
|
|
1450 return; /* Shouldn't ever happen */
|
|
|
1451
|
|
|
1452 if (info != (guint)TARGET_STRING
|
|
|
1453 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1454 && info != (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING
|
|
|
1455 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIMENC
|
|
|
1456 #endif
|
|
|
1457 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIM
|
|
|
1458 && info != (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT
|
|
|
1459 && info != (guint)TARGET_TEXT)
|
|
|
1460 return;
|
|
|
1461
|
|
|
1462 /* get the selection from the '*'/'+' register */
|
|
|
1463 clip_get_selection(cbd);
|
|
|
1464
|
|
|
1465 motion_type = clip_convert_selection(&string, &tmplen, cbd);
|
|
|
1466 if (motion_type < 0 || string == NULL)
|
|
|
1467 return;
|
|
|
1468 /* Due to int arguments we can't handle more than G_MAXINT. Also
|
|
|
1469 * reserve one extra byte for NUL or the motion type; just in case.
|
|
|
1470 * (Not that pasting 2G of text is ever going to work, but... ;-) */
|
|
|
1471 length = MIN(tmplen, (long_u)(G_MAXINT - 1));
|
|
|
1472
|
|
|
1473 if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIM)
|
|
|
1474 {
|
|
|
1475 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + 1);
|
|
|
1476 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1477 {
|
|
|
1478 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type;
|
|
|
1479 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + 1, string, (size_t)length);
|
|
|
1480 }
|
|
|
1481 /* For our own format, the first byte contains the motion type */
|
|
|
1482 ++length;
|
|
|
1483 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1484 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1485 type = vim_atom;
|
|
|
1486 }
|
|
|
1487
|
|
|
1488 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1489 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIMENC)
|
|
|
1490 {
|
|
|
1491 int l = STRLEN(p_enc);
|
|
|
1492
|
|
|
1493 /* contents: motion_type 'encoding' NUL text */
|
|
|
1494 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + l + 2);
|
|
|
1495 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1496 {
|
|
|
1497 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type;
|
|
|
1498 STRCPY(tmpbuf + 1, p_enc);
|
|
|
1499 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + l + 2, string, (size_t)length);
|
|
|
1500 }
|
|
|
1501 length += l + 2;
|
|
|
1502 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1503 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1504 type = vimenc_atom;
|
|
|
1505 }
|
|
|
1506 #endif
|
|
|
1507
|
|
|
1508 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1509 /* gtk_selection_data_set_text() handles everything for us. This is
|
|
|
1510 * so easy and simple and cool, it'd be insane not to use it. */
|
|
|
1511 else
|
|
|
1512 {
|
|
|
1513 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1514 {
|
|
|
1515 tmpbuf = string_convert(&output_conv, string, &length);
|
|
|
1516 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1517 if (tmpbuf == NULL)
|
|
|
1518 return;
|
|
|
1519 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1520 }
|
|
|
1521 /* Validate the string to avoid runtime warnings */
|
|
|
1522 if (g_utf8_validate((const char *)string, (gssize)length, NULL))
|
|
|
1523 {
|
|
|
1524 gtk_selection_data_set_text(selection_data,
|
|
|
1525 (const char *)string, length);
|
|
|
1526 }
|
|
|
1527 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1528 return;
|
|
|
1529 }
|
|
|
1530 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1531 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1532 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING)
|
|
|
1533 {
|
|
|
1534 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
1535
|
|
|
1536 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
1537 convert_setup(&conv, p_enc, (char_u *)"utf-8");
|
|
|
1538
|
|
|
1539 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1540 {
|
|
|
1541 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, string, &length);
|
|
|
1542 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
1543 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1544 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1545 }
|
|
|
1546 type = utf8_string_atom;
|
|
|
1547 }
|
|
|
1548 # endif
|
|
|
1549 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT
|
|
|
1550 || info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT)
|
|
|
1551 {
|
|
|
1552 int format;
|
|
|
1553
|
|
|
1554 /* Copy the string to ensure NUL-termination */
|
|
|
1555 tmpbuf = vim_strnsave(string, length);
|
|
|
1556 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1557 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1558 {
|
|
|
1559 gdk_string_to_compound_text((const char *)tmpbuf,
|
|
|
1560 &type, &format, &string, &length);
|
|
|
1561 vim_free(tmpbuf);
|
|
|
1562 selection_data->type = type;
|
|
|
1563 selection_data->format = format;
|
|
|
1564 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, format, string, length);
|
|
|
1565 gdk_free_compound_text(string);
|
|
|
1566 }
|
|
|
1567 return;
|
|
|
1568 }
|
|
|
1569 else
|
|
|
1570 {
|
|
|
1571 type = GDK_TARGET_STRING;
|
|
|
1572 }
|
|
|
1573 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1574
|
|
|
1575 if (string != NULL)
|
|
|
1576 {
|
|
|
1577 selection_data->type = selection_data->target;
|
|
|
1578 selection_data->format = 8; /* 8 bits per char */
|
|
|
1579
|
|
|
1580 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, 8, string, length);
|
|
|
1581 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1582 }
|
|
|
1583 }
|
|
|
1584
|
|
|
1585 /*
|
|
|
1586 * Check if the GUI can be started. Called before gvimrc is sourced.
|
|
|
1587 * Return OK or FAIL.
|
|
|
1588 */
|
|
|
1589 int
|
|
|
1590 gui_mch_init_check(void)
|
|
|
1591 {
|
|
|
1592 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
1226
|
1593 /* This is needed to make the locale handling consistent between the GUI
|
|
7
|
1594 * and the rest of VIM. */
|
|
|
1595 gtk_set_locale();
|
|
|
1596 #endif
|
|
|
1597
|
|
|
1598 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
1599 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
1600 using_gnome = 1;
|
|
|
1601 #endif
|
|
|
1602
|
|
|
1603 /* Don't use gtk_init() or gnome_init(), it exits on failure. */
|
|
|
1604 if (!gtk_init_check(&gui_argc, &gui_argv))
|
|
|
1605 {
|
|
|
1606 gui.dying = TRUE;
|
|
1666
|
1607 EMSG(_((char *)e_opendisp));
|
|
7
|
1608 return FAIL;
|
|
|
1609 }
|
|
|
1610
|
|
|
1611 return OK;
|
|
|
1612 }
|
|
|
1613
|
|
|
1614
|
|
|
1615 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
1616 * Mouse handling callbacks
|
|
|
1617 */
|
|
|
1618
|
|
|
1619
|
|
|
1620 static guint mouse_click_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1621 static int mouse_timed_out = TRUE;
|
|
|
1622
|
|
|
1623 /*
|
|
|
1624 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button
|
|
|
1625 */
|
|
|
1626 static gint
|
|
|
1627 mouse_click_timer_cb(gpointer data)
|
|
|
1628 {
|
|
|
1629 /* we don't use this information currently */
|
|
|
1630 int *timed_out = (int *) data;
|
|
|
1631
|
|
|
1632 *timed_out = TRUE;
|
|
|
1633 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */
|
|
|
1634 }
|
|
|
1635
|
|
|
1636 static guint motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1637 static int motion_repeat_offset = FALSE;
|
|
|
1638 static gint motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer);
|
|
|
1639
|
|
|
1640 static void
|
|
|
1641 process_motion_notify(int x, int y, GdkModifierType state)
|
|
|
1642 {
|
|
|
1643 int button;
|
|
|
1644 int_u vim_modifiers;
|
|
|
1645
|
|
|
1646 button = (state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK |
|
|
|
1647 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK |
|
|
|
1648 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK))
|
|
|
1649 ? MOUSE_DRAG : ' ';
|
|
|
1650
|
|
|
1651 /* If our pointer is currently hidden, then we should show it. */
|
|
|
1652 gui_mch_mousehide(FALSE);
|
|
|
1653
|
|
|
1654 /* Just moving the rodent above the drawing area without any button
|
|
|
1655 * being pressed. */
|
|
|
1656 if (button != MOUSE_DRAG)
|
|
|
1657 {
|
|
|
1658 gui_mouse_moved(x, y);
|
|
|
1659 return;
|
|
|
1660 }
|
|
|
1661
|
|
|
1662 /* translate modifier coding between the main engine and GTK */
|
|
179
|
1663 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state);
|
|
7
|
1664
|
|
1226
|
1665 /* inform the editor engine about the occurrence of this event */
|
|
7
|
1666 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1667
|
|
|
1668 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1669 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1670
|
|
|
1671 /*
|
|
|
1672 * Auto repeat timer handling.
|
|
|
1673 */
|
|
|
1674 if (x < 0 || y < 0
|
|
|
1675 || x >= gui.drawarea->allocation.width
|
|
|
1676 || y >= gui.drawarea->allocation.height)
|
|
|
1677 {
|
|
|
1678
|
|
|
1679 int dx;
|
|
|
1680 int dy;
|
|
|
1681 int offshoot;
|
|
|
1682 int delay = 10;
|
|
|
1683
|
|
|
1684 /* Calculate the maximal distance of the cursor from the drawing area.
|
|
|
1685 * (offshoot can't become negative here!).
|
|
|
1686 */
|
|
|
1687 dx = x < 0 ? -x : x - gui.drawarea->allocation.width;
|
|
|
1688 dy = y < 0 ? -y : y - gui.drawarea->allocation.height;
|
|
|
1689
|
|
|
1690 offshoot = dx > dy ? dx : dy;
|
|
|
1691
|
|
1884
|
1692 /* Make a linearly decaying timer delay with a threshold of 5 at a
|
|
7
|
1693 * distance of 127 pixels from the main window.
|
|
|
1694 *
|
|
|
1695 * One could think endlessly about the most ergonomic variant here.
|
|
|
1696 * For example it could make sense to calculate the distance from the
|
|
|
1697 * drags start instead...
|
|
|
1698 *
|
|
|
1699 * Maybe a parabolic interpolation would suite us better here too...
|
|
|
1700 */
|
|
|
1701 if (offshoot > 127)
|
|
|
1702 {
|
|
|
1703 /* 5 appears to be somehow near to my perceptual limits :-). */
|
|
|
1704 delay = 5;
|
|
|
1705 }
|
|
|
1706 else
|
|
|
1707 {
|
|
|
1708 delay = (130 * (127 - offshoot)) / 127 + 5;
|
|
|
1709 }
|
|
|
1710
|
|
|
1711 /* shoot again */
|
|
|
1712 if (!motion_repeat_timer)
|
|
|
1713 motion_repeat_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)delay,
|
|
|
1714 motion_repeat_timer_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
1715 }
|
|
|
1716 }
|
|
|
1717
|
|
|
1718 /*
|
|
|
1719 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button.
|
|
|
1720 */
|
|
|
1721 static gint
|
|
1884
|
1722 motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
1723 {
|
|
|
1724 int x;
|
|
|
1725 int y;
|
|
|
1726 GdkModifierType state;
|
|
|
1727
|
|
|
1728 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, &x, &y, &state);
|
|
|
1729
|
|
|
1730 if (!(state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK |
|
|
|
1731 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK |
|
|
|
1732 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK)))
|
|
|
1733 {
|
|
|
1734 motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1735 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1736 }
|
|
|
1737
|
|
|
1738 /* If there already is a mouse click in the input buffer, wait another
|
|
|
1739 * time (otherwise we would create a backlog of clicks) */
|
|
|
1740 if (vim_used_in_input_buf() > 10)
|
|
|
1741 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1742
|
|
|
1743 motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1744
|
|
|
1745 /*
|
|
|
1746 * Fake a motion event.
|
|
|
1747 * Trick: Pretend the mouse moved to the next character on every other
|
|
|
1748 * event, otherwise drag events will be discarded, because they are still
|
|
|
1749 * in the same character.
|
|
|
1750 */
|
|
|
1751 if (motion_repeat_offset)
|
|
|
1752 x += gui.char_width;
|
|
|
1753
|
|
|
1754 motion_repeat_offset = !motion_repeat_offset;
|
|
|
1755 process_motion_notify(x, y, state);
|
|
|
1756
|
|
|
1757 /* Don't happen again. We will get reinstalled in the synthetic event
|
|
|
1758 * if needed -- thus repeating should still work. */
|
|
|
1759 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1760 }
|
|
|
1761
|
|
|
1762 static gint
|
|
1884
|
1763 motion_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
1764 GdkEventMotion *event,
|
|
|
1765 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
1766 {
|
|
|
1767 if (event->is_hint)
|
|
|
1768 {
|
|
|
1769 int x;
|
|
|
1770 int y;
|
|
|
1771 GdkModifierType state;
|
|
|
1772
|
|
|
1773 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, &x, &y, &state);
|
|
|
1774 process_motion_notify(x, y, state);
|
|
|
1775 }
|
|
|
1776 else
|
|
|
1777 {
|
|
|
1778 process_motion_notify((int)event->x, (int)event->y,
|
|
|
1779 (GdkModifierType)event->state);
|
|
|
1780 }
|
|
|
1781
|
|
|
1782 return TRUE; /* handled */
|
|
|
1783 }
|
|
|
1784
|
|
|
1785
|
|
|
1786 /*
|
|
|
1787 * Mouse button handling. Note please that we are capturing multiple click's
|
|
|
1788 * by our own timeout mechanism instead of the one provided by GTK+ itself.
|
|
|
1789 * This is due to the way the generic VIM code is recognizing multiple clicks.
|
|
|
1790 */
|
|
|
1791 static gint
|
|
1884
|
1792 button_press_event(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
1793 GdkEventButton *event,
|
|
|
1794 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
1795 {
|
|
|
1796 int button;
|
|
|
1797 int repeated_click = FALSE;
|
|
|
1798 int x, y;
|
|
|
1799 int_u vim_modifiers;
|
|
|
1800
|
|
|
1801 /* Make sure we have focus now we've been selected */
|
|
|
1802 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget))
|
|
|
1803 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget);
|
|
|
1804
|
|
|
1805 /*
|
|
|
1806 * Don't let additional events about multiple clicks send by GTK to us
|
|
|
1807 * after the initial button press event confuse us.
|
|
|
1808 */
|
|
|
1809 if (event->type != GDK_BUTTON_PRESS)
|
|
|
1810 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1811
|
|
|
1812 x = event->x;
|
|
|
1813 y = event->y;
|
|
|
1814
|
|
|
1815 /* Handle multiple clicks */
|
|
|
1816 if (!mouse_timed_out && mouse_click_timer)
|
|
|
1817 {
|
|
|
1818 gtk_timeout_remove(mouse_click_timer);
|
|
|
1819 mouse_click_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1820 repeated_click = TRUE;
|
|
|
1821 }
|
|
|
1822
|
|
|
1823 mouse_timed_out = FALSE;
|
|
|
1824 mouse_click_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)p_mouset,
|
|
|
1825 mouse_click_timer_cb, &mouse_timed_out);
|
|
|
1826
|
|
|
1827 switch (event->button)
|
|
|
1828 {
|
|
|
1829 case 1:
|
|
|
1830 button = MOUSE_LEFT;
|
|
|
1831 break;
|
|
|
1832 case 2:
|
|
|
1833 button = MOUSE_MIDDLE;
|
|
|
1834 break;
|
|
|
1835 case 3:
|
|
|
1836 button = MOUSE_RIGHT;
|
|
|
1837 break;
|
|
|
1838 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1839 case 4:
|
|
|
1840 button = MOUSE_4;
|
|
|
1841 break;
|
|
|
1842 case 5:
|
|
|
1843 button = MOUSE_5;
|
|
|
1844 break;
|
|
|
1845 #endif
|
|
|
1846 default:
|
|
|
1847 return FALSE; /* Unknown button */
|
|
|
1848 }
|
|
|
1849
|
|
|
1850 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
1851 /* cancel any preediting */
|
|
|
1852 if (im_is_preediting())
|
|
|
1853 xim_reset();
|
|
|
1854 #endif
|
|
|
1855
|
|
179
|
1856 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state);
|
|
7
|
1857
|
|
|
1858 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, repeated_click, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1859 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1860 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure the above will be handled immediately */
|
|
|
1861
|
|
|
1862 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1863 }
|
|
|
1864
|
|
|
1865 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1866 /*
|
|
|
1867 * GTK+ 2 doesn't handle mouse buttons 4, 5, 6 and 7 the same way as GTK+ 1.
|
|
|
1868 * Instead, it abstracts scrolling via the new GdkEventScroll.
|
|
|
1869 */
|
|
|
1870 static gboolean
|
|
1884
|
1871 scroll_event(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
1872 GdkEventScroll *event,
|
|
|
1873 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
1874 {
|
|
|
1875 int button;
|
|
179
|
1876 int_u vim_modifiers;
|
|
7
|
1877
|
|
|
1878 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget))
|
|
|
1879 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget);
|
|
|
1880
|
|
|
1881 switch (event->direction)
|
|
|
1882 {
|
|
|
1883 case GDK_SCROLL_UP:
|
|
|
1884 button = MOUSE_4;
|
|
|
1885 break;
|
|
|
1886 case GDK_SCROLL_DOWN:
|
|
|
1887 button = MOUSE_5;
|
|
|
1888 break;
|
|
|
1889 default: /* We don't care about left and right... Yet. */
|
|
|
1890 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1891 }
|
|
|
1892
|
|
|
1893 # ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
1894 /* cancel any preediting */
|
|
|
1895 if (im_is_preediting())
|
|
|
1896 xim_reset();
|
|
|
1897 # endif
|
|
|
1898
|
|
179
|
1899 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state);
|
|
7
|
1900
|
|
|
1901 gui_send_mouse_event(button, (int)event->x, (int)event->y,
|
|
|
1902 FALSE, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1903
|
|
|
1904 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1905 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure the above will be handled immediately */
|
|
|
1906
|
|
|
1907 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1908 }
|
|
|
1909 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1910
|
|
|
1911
|
|
|
1912 static gint
|
|
1884
|
1913 button_release_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
|
1914 GdkEventButton *event,
|
|
|
1915 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
1916 {
|
|
|
1917 int x, y;
|
|
|
1918 int_u vim_modifiers;
|
|
|
1919
|
|
|
1920 /* Remove any motion "machine gun" timers used for automatic further
|
|
|
1921 extension of allocation areas if outside of the applications window
|
|
|
1922 area .*/
|
|
|
1923 if (motion_repeat_timer)
|
|
|
1924 {
|
|
|
1925 gtk_timeout_remove(motion_repeat_timer);
|
|
|
1926 motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1927 }
|
|
|
1928
|
|
|
1929 x = event->x;
|
|
|
1930 y = event->y;
|
|
|
1931
|
|
179
|
1932 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state);
|
|
7
|
1933
|
|
|
1934 gui_send_mouse_event(MOUSE_RELEASE, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1935 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1936 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure it will be handled immediately */
|
|
|
1937
|
|
|
1938 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1939 }
|
|
|
1940
|
|
|
1941
|
|
|
1942 #ifdef FEAT_DND
|
|
|
1943 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
1944 * Drag aNd Drop support handlers.
|
|
|
1945 */
|
|
|
1946
|
|
|
1947 /*
|
|
|
1948 * Count how many items there may be and separate them with a NUL.
|
|
|
1949 * Apparently the items are separated with \r\n. This is not documented,
|
|
|
1950 * thus be careful not to go past the end. Also allow separation with
|
|
|
1951 * NUL characters.
|
|
|
1952 */
|
|
|
1953 static int
|
|
|
1954 count_and_decode_uri_list(char_u *out, char_u *raw, int len)
|
|
|
1955 {
|
|
|
1956 int i;
|
|
|
1957 char_u *p = out;
|
|
|
1958 int count = 0;
|
|
|
1959
|
|
|
1960 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
|
|
|
1961 {
|
|
|
1962 if (raw[i] == NUL || raw[i] == '\n' || raw[i] == '\r')
|
|
|
1963 {
|
|
|
1964 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL)
|
|
|
1965 {
|
|
|
1966 ++count;
|
|
|
1967 *p++ = NUL;
|
|
|
1968 }
|
|
|
1969 }
|
|
|
1970 else if (raw[i] == '%' && i + 2 < len && hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1) > 0)
|
|
|
1971 {
|
|
|
1972 *p++ = hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1);
|
|
|
1973 i += 2;
|
|
|
1974 }
|
|
|
1975 else
|
|
|
1976 *p++ = raw[i];
|
|
|
1977 }
|
|
|
1978 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL)
|
|
|
1979 {
|
|
|
1980 *p = NUL; /* last item didn't have \r or \n */
|
|
|
1981 ++count;
|
|
|
1982 }
|
|
|
1983 return count;
|
|
|
1984 }
|
|
|
1985
|
|
|
1986 /*
|
|
|
1987 * Parse NUL separated "src" strings. Make it an array "outlist" form. On
|
|
|
1988 * this process, URI which protocol is not "file:" are removed. Return
|
|
|
1989 * length of array (less than "max").
|
|
|
1990 */
|
|
|
1991 static int
|
|
|
1992 filter_uri_list(char_u **outlist, int max, char_u *src)
|
|
|
1993 {
|
|
|
1994 int i, j;
|
|
|
1995
|
|
|
1996 for (i = j = 0; i < max; ++i)
|
|
|
1997 {
|
|
|
1998 outlist[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
1999 if (STRNCMP(src, "file:", 5) == 0)
|
|
|
2000 {
|
|
|
2001 src += 5;
|
|
|
2002 if (STRNCMP(src, "//localhost", 11) == 0)
|
|
|
2003 src += 11;
|
|
|
2004 while (src[0] == '/' && src[1] == '/')
|
|
|
2005 ++src;
|
|
|
2006 outlist[j++] = vim_strsave(src);
|
|
|
2007 }
|
|
|
2008 src += STRLEN(src) + 1;
|
|
|
2009 }
|
|
|
2010 return j;
|
|
|
2011 }
|
|
|
2012
|
|
|
2013 static char_u **
|
|
|
2014 parse_uri_list(int *count, char_u *data, int len)
|
|
|
2015 {
|
|
|
2016 int n = 0;
|
|
|
2017 char_u *tmp = NULL;
|
|
|
2018 char_u **array = NULL;;
|
|
|
2019
|
|
|
2020 if (data != NULL && len > 0 && (tmp = (char_u *)alloc(len + 1)) != NULL)
|
|
|
2021 {
|
|
|
2022 n = count_and_decode_uri_list(tmp, data, len);
|
|
|
2023 if (n > 0 && (array = (char_u **)alloc(n * sizeof(char_u *))) != NULL)
|
|
|
2024 n = filter_uri_list(array, n, tmp);
|
|
|
2025 }
|
|
|
2026 vim_free(tmp);
|
|
|
2027 *count = n;
|
|
|
2028 return array;
|
|
|
2029 }
|
|
|
2030
|
|
|
2031 static void
|
|
|
2032 drag_handle_uri_list(GdkDragContext *context,
|
|
|
2033 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
|
2034 guint time_,
|
|
|
2035 GdkModifierType state,
|
|
|
2036 gint x,
|
|
|
2037 gint y)
|
|
|
2038 {
|
|
|
2039 char_u **fnames;
|
|
|
2040 int nfiles = 0;
|
|
|
2041
|
|
|
2042 fnames = parse_uri_list(&nfiles, data->data, data->length);
|
|
|
2043
|
|
|
2044 if (fnames != NULL && nfiles > 0)
|
|
|
2045 {
|
|
179
|
2046 int_u modifiers;
|
|
7
|
2047
|
|
|
2048 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */
|
|
|
2049
|
|
179
|
2050 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state);
|
|
7
|
2051
|
|
|
2052 gui_handle_drop(x, y, modifiers, fnames, nfiles);
|
|
|
2053 }
|
|
840
|
2054 else
|
|
|
2055 vim_free(fnames);
|
|
7
|
2056 }
|
|
|
2057
|
|
|
2058 static void
|
|
|
2059 drag_handle_text(GdkDragContext *context,
|
|
|
2060 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
|
2061 guint time_,
|
|
|
2062 GdkModifierType state)
|
|
|
2063 {
|
|
|
2064 char_u dropkey[6] = {CSI, KS_MODIFIER, 0, CSI, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_DROP};
|
|
|
2065 char_u *text;
|
|
|
2066 int len;
|
|
|
2067 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
2068 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL;
|
|
|
2069 # endif
|
|
|
2070
|
|
|
2071 text = data->data;
|
|
|
2072 len = data->length;
|
|
|
2073
|
|
|
2074 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
2075 if (data->type == utf8_string_atom)
|
|
|
2076 {
|
|
|
2077 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2078 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
2079 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
2080 # else
|
|
|
2081 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
2082
|
|
|
2083 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
2084 convert_setup(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-8", p_enc);
|
|
|
2085
|
|
|
2086 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
2087 {
|
|
|
2088 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
2089 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
2090 }
|
|
|
2091 # endif
|
|
|
2092 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
2093 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
2094 }
|
|
|
2095 # endif /* FEAT_MBYTE */
|
|
|
2096
|
|
|
2097 dnd_yank_drag_data(text, (long)len);
|
|
|
2098 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */
|
|
|
2099 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
2100 vim_free(tmpbuf);
|
|
|
2101 # endif
|
|
|
2102
|
|
179
|
2103 dropkey[2] = modifiers_gdk2vim(state);
|
|
7
|
2104
|
|
|
2105 if (dropkey[2] != 0)
|
|
|
2106 add_to_input_buf(dropkey, (int)sizeof(dropkey));
|
|
|
2107 else
|
|
|
2108 add_to_input_buf(dropkey + 3, (int)(sizeof(dropkey) - 3));
|
|
|
2109
|
|
|
2110 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
2111 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
2112 }
|
|
|
2113
|
|
|
2114 /*
|
|
|
2115 * DND receiver.
|
|
|
2116 */
|
|
|
2117 static void
|
|
|
2118 drag_data_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
2119 GdkDragContext *context,
|
|
|
2120 gint x,
|
|
|
2121 gint y,
|
|
|
2122 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
|
2123 guint info,
|
|
|
2124 guint time_,
|
|
1884
|
2125 gpointer user_data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
2126 {
|
|
|
2127 GdkModifierType state;
|
|
|
2128
|
|
|
2129 /* Guard against trash */
|
|
|
2130 if (data->data == NULL
|
|
|
2131 || data->length <= 0
|
|
|
2132 || data->format != 8
|
|
|
2133 || data->data[data->length] != '\0')
|
|
|
2134 {
|
|
|
2135 gtk_drag_finish(context, FALSE, FALSE, time_);
|
|
|
2136 return;
|
|
|
2137 }
|
|
|
2138
|
|
|
2139 /* Get the current modifier state for proper distinguishment between
|
|
|
2140 * different operations later. */
|
|
|
2141 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, NULL, NULL, &state);
|
|
|
2142
|
|
|
2143 /* Not sure about the role of "text/plain" here... */
|
|
|
2144 if (info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST)
|
|
|
2145 drag_handle_uri_list(context, data, time_, state, x, y);
|
|
|
2146 else
|
|
|
2147 drag_handle_text(context, data, time_, state);
|
|
|
2148
|
|
|
2149 }
|
|
|
2150 #endif /* FEAT_DND */
|
|
|
2151
|
|
|
2152
|
|
|
2153 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
2154 /*
|
|
|
2155 * GnomeClient interact callback. Check for unsaved buffers that cannot
|
|
|
2156 * be abandoned and pop up a dialog asking the user for confirmation if
|
|
|
2157 * necessary.
|
|
|
2158 */
|
|
|
2159 static void
|
|
|
2160 sm_client_check_changed_any(GnomeClient *client,
|
|
|
2161 gint key,
|
|
|
2162 GnomeDialogType type,
|
|
|
2163 gpointer data)
|
|
|
2164 {
|
|
|
2165 cmdmod_T save_cmdmod;
|
|
|
2166 gboolean shutdown_cancelled;
|
|
|
2167
|
|
|
2168 save_cmdmod = cmdmod;
|
|
|
2169
|
|
|
2170 # ifdef FEAT_BROWSE
|
|
|
2171 cmdmod.browse = TRUE;
|
|
|
2172 # endif
|
|
|
2173 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_DIALOG) || defined(FEAT_CON_DIALOG)
|
|
|
2174 cmdmod.confirm = TRUE;
|
|
|
2175 # endif
|
|
|
2176 /*
|
|
|
2177 * If there are changed buffers, present the user with
|
|
|
2178 * a dialog if possible, otherwise give an error message.
|
|
|
2179 */
|
|
|
2180 shutdown_cancelled = check_changed_any(FALSE);
|
|
|
2181
|
|
|
2182 exiting = FALSE;
|
|
|
2183 cmdmod = save_cmdmod;
|
|
|
2184 setcursor(); /* position the cursor */
|
|
|
2185 out_flush();
|
|
|
2186 /*
|
|
|
2187 * If the user hit the [Cancel] button the whole shutdown
|
|
|
2188 * will be cancelled. Wow, quite powerful feature (:
|
|
|
2189 */
|
|
|
2190 gnome_interaction_key_return(key, shutdown_cancelled);
|
|
|
2191 }
|
|
|
2192
|
|
|
2193 /*
|
|
|
2194 * Generate a script that can be used to restore the current editing session.
|
|
|
2195 * Save the value of v:this_session before running :mksession in order to make
|
|
|
2196 * automagic session save fully transparent. Return TRUE on success.
|
|
|
2197 */
|
|
|
2198 static int
|
|
|
2199 write_session_file(char_u *filename)
|
|
|
2200 {
|
|
|
2201 char_u *escaped_filename;
|
|
|
2202 char *mksession_cmdline;
|
|
|
2203 unsigned int save_ssop_flags;
|
|
|
2204 int failed;
|
|
|
2205
|
|
|
2206 /*
|
|
|
2207 * Build an ex command line to create a script that restores the current
|
|
|
2208 * session if executed. Escape the filename to avoid nasty surprises.
|
|
|
2209 */
|
|
|
2210 escaped_filename = vim_strsave_escaped(filename, escape_chars);
|
|
|
2211 if (escaped_filename == NULL)
|
|
|
2212 return FALSE;
|
|
1296
|
2213 mksession_cmdline = g_strconcat("mksession ", (char *)escaped_filename,
|
|
|
2214 NULL);
|
|
7
|
2215 vim_free(escaped_filename);
|
|
1296
|
2216
|
|
7
|
2217 /*
|
|
|
2218 * Use a reasonable hardcoded set of 'sessionoptions' flags to avoid
|
|
|
2219 * unpredictable effects when the session is saved automatically. Also,
|
|
|
2220 * we definitely need SSOP_GLOBALS to be able to restore v:this_session.
|
|
|
2221 * Don't use SSOP_BUFFERS to prevent the buffer list from becoming
|
|
|
2222 * enormously large if the GNOME session feature is used regularly.
|
|
|
2223 */
|
|
|
2224 save_ssop_flags = ssop_flags;
|
|
|
2225 ssop_flags = (SSOP_BLANK|SSOP_CURDIR|SSOP_FOLDS|SSOP_GLOBALS
|
|
1296
|
2226 |SSOP_HELP|SSOP_OPTIONS|SSOP_WINSIZE|SSOP_TABPAGES);
|
|
7
|
2227
|
|
|
2228 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let Save_VV_this_session = v:this_session");
|
|
|
2229 failed = (do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)mksession_cmdline) == FAIL);
|
|
|
2230 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session");
|
|
150
|
2231 do_unlet((char_u *)"Save_VV_this_session", TRUE);
|
|
7
|
2232
|
|
|
2233 ssop_flags = save_ssop_flags;
|
|
|
2234 g_free(mksession_cmdline);
|
|
|
2235 /*
|
|
|
2236 * Reopen the file and append a command to restore v:this_session,
|
|
|
2237 * as if this save never happened. This is to avoid conflicts with
|
|
|
2238 * the user's own sessions. FIXME: It's probably less hackish to add
|
|
|
2239 * a "stealth" flag to 'sessionoptions' -- gotta ask Bram.
|
|
|
2240 */
|
|
|
2241 if (!failed)
|
|
|
2242 {
|
|
|
2243 FILE *fd;
|
|
|
2244
|
|
|
2245 fd = open_exfile(filename, TRUE, APPENDBIN);
|
|
|
2246
|
|
|
2247 failed = (fd == NULL
|
|
|
2248 || put_line(fd, "let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL
|
|
|
2249 || put_line(fd, "unlet Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL);
|
|
|
2250
|
|
|
2251 if (fd != NULL && fclose(fd) != 0)
|
|
|
2252 failed = TRUE;
|
|
|
2253
|
|
|
2254 if (failed)
|
|
|
2255 mch_remove(filename);
|
|
|
2256 }
|
|
|
2257
|
|
|
2258 return !failed;
|
|
|
2259 }
|
|
|
2260
|
|
|
2261 /*
|
|
|
2262 * "save_yourself" signal handler. Initiate an interaction to ask the user
|
|
|
2263 * for confirmation if necessary. Save the current editing session and tell
|
|
|
2264 * the session manager how to restart Vim.
|
|
|
2265 */
|
|
|
2266 static gboolean
|
|
|
2267 sm_client_save_yourself(GnomeClient *client,
|
|
|
2268 gint phase,
|
|
|
2269 GnomeSaveStyle save_style,
|
|
|
2270 gboolean shutdown,
|
|
|
2271 GnomeInteractStyle interact_style,
|
|
|
2272 gboolean fast,
|
|
|
2273 gpointer data)
|
|
|
2274 {
|
|
|
2275 static const char suffix[] = "-session.vim";
|
|
|
2276 char *session_file;
|
|
|
2277 unsigned int len;
|
|
|
2278 gboolean success;
|
|
|
2279
|
|
|
2280 /* Always request an interaction if possible. check_changed_any()
|
|
|
2281 * won't actually show a dialog unless any buffers have been modified.
|
|
|
2282 * There doesn't seem to be an obvious way to check that without
|
|
|
2283 * automatically firing the dialog. Anyway, it works just fine. */
|
|
|
2284 if (interact_style == GNOME_INTERACT_ANY)
|
|
|
2285 gnome_client_request_interaction(client, GNOME_DIALOG_NORMAL,
|
|
|
2286 &sm_client_check_changed_any,
|
|
|
2287 NULL);
|
|
|
2288 out_flush();
|
|
|
2289 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
|
|
|
2290
|
|
|
2291 /* The path is unique for each session save. We do neither know nor care
|
|
|
2292 * which session script will actually be used later. This decision is in
|
|
|
2293 * the domain of the session manager. */
|
|
|
2294 session_file = gnome_config_get_real_path(
|
|
|
2295 gnome_client_get_config_prefix(client));
|
|
|
2296 len = strlen(session_file);
|
|
|
2297
|
|
|
2298 if (len > 0 && session_file[len-1] == G_DIR_SEPARATOR)
|
|
|
2299 --len; /* get rid of the superfluous trailing '/' */
|
|
|
2300
|
|
|
2301 session_file = g_renew(char, session_file, len + sizeof(suffix));
|
|
|
2302 memcpy(session_file + len, suffix, sizeof(suffix));
|
|
|
2303
|
|
|
2304 success = write_session_file((char_u *)session_file);
|
|
|
2305
|
|
|
2306 if (success)
|
|
|
2307 {
|
|
|
2308 const char *argv[8];
|
|
|
2309 int i;
|
|
|
2310
|
|
|
2311 /* Tell the session manager how to wipe out the stored session data.
|
|
|
2312 * This isn't as dangerous as it looks, don't worry :) session_file
|
|
|
2313 * is a unique absolute filename. Usually it'll be something like
|
|
|
2314 * `/home/user/.gnome2/vim-XXXXXX-session.vim'. */
|
|
|
2315 i = 0;
|
|
|
2316 argv[i++] = "rm";
|
|
|
2317 argv[i++] = session_file;
|
|
|
2318 argv[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
2319
|
|
|
2320 gnome_client_set_discard_command(client, i, (char **)argv);
|
|
|
2321
|
|
|
2322 /* Tell the session manager how to restore the just saved session.
|
|
|
2323 * This is easily done thanks to Vim's -S option. Pass the -f flag
|
|
|
2324 * since there's no need to fork -- it might even cause confusion.
|
|
|
2325 * Also pass the window role to give the WM something to match on.
|
|
|
2326 * The role is set in gui_mch_open(), thus should _never_ be NULL. */
|
|
|
2327 i = 0;
|
|
|
2328 argv[i++] = restart_command;
|
|
|
2329 argv[i++] = "-f";
|
|
|
2330 argv[i++] = "-g";
|
|
|
2331 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2332 argv[i++] = "--role";
|
|
|
2333 argv[i++] = gtk_window_get_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
2334 # endif
|
|
|
2335 argv[i++] = "-S";
|
|
|
2336 argv[i++] = session_file;
|
|
|
2337 argv[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
2338
|
|
|
2339 gnome_client_set_restart_command(client, i, (char **)argv);
|
|
|
2340 gnome_client_set_clone_command(client, 0, NULL);
|
|
|
2341 }
|
|
|
2342
|
|
|
2343 g_free(session_file);
|
|
|
2344
|
|
|
2345 return success;
|
|
|
2346 }
|
|
|
2347
|
|
|
2348 /*
|
|
|
2349 * Called when the session manager wants us to die. There isn't much to save
|
|
|
2350 * here since "save_yourself" has been emitted before (unless serious trouble
|
|
|
2351 * is happening).
|
|
|
2352 */
|
|
|
2353 static void
|
|
|
2354 sm_client_die(GnomeClient *client, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2355 {
|
|
|
2356 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */
|
|
|
2357 full_screen = FALSE;
|
|
|
2358
|
|
1666
|
2359 vim_strncpy(IObuff, (char_u *)
|
|
419
|
2360 _("Vim: Received \"die\" request from session manager\n"),
|
|
1666
|
2361 IOSIZE - 1);
|
|
7
|
2362 preserve_exit();
|
|
|
2363 }
|
|
|
2364
|
|
|
2365 /*
|
|
|
2366 * Connect our signal handlers to be notified on session save and shutdown.
|
|
|
2367 */
|
|
|
2368 static void
|
|
|
2369 setup_save_yourself(void)
|
|
|
2370 {
|
|
|
2371 GnomeClient *client;
|
|
|
2372
|
|
|
2373 client = gnome_master_client();
|
|
|
2374
|
|
|
2375 if (client != NULL)
|
|
|
2376 {
|
|
|
2377 /* Must use the deprecated gtk_signal_connect() for compatibility
|
|
|
2378 * with GNOME 1. Arrgh, zombies! */
|
|
|
2379 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "save_yourself",
|
|
|
2380 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_save_yourself), NULL);
|
|
|
2381 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "die",
|
|
|
2382 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_die), NULL);
|
|
|
2383 }
|
|
|
2384 }
|
|
|
2385
|
|
|
2386 #else /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */
|
|
|
2387
|
|
|
2388 # ifdef USE_XSMP
|
|
|
2389 /*
|
|
|
2390 * GTK tells us that XSMP needs attention
|
|
|
2391 */
|
|
|
2392 static gboolean
|
|
|
2393 local_xsmp_handle_requests(source, condition, data)
|
|
1884
|
2394 GIOChannel *source UNUSED;
|
|
7
|
2395 GIOCondition condition;
|
|
|
2396 gpointer data;
|
|
|
2397 {
|
|
|
2398 if (condition == G_IO_IN)
|
|
|
2399 {
|
|
|
2400 /* Do stuff; maybe close connection */
|
|
|
2401 if (xsmp_handle_requests() == FAIL)
|
|
|
2402 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data);
|
|
|
2403 return TRUE;
|
|
|
2404 }
|
|
|
2405 /* Error */
|
|
|
2406 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data);
|
|
|
2407 xsmp_close();
|
|
|
2408 return TRUE;
|
|
|
2409 }
|
|
|
2410 # endif /* USE_XSMP */
|
|
|
2411
|
|
|
2412 /*
|
|
|
2413 * Setup the WM_PROTOCOLS to indicate we want the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event.
|
|
|
2414 * This is an ugly use of X functions. GTK doesn't offer an alternative.
|
|
|
2415 */
|
|
|
2416 static void
|
|
|
2417 setup_save_yourself(void)
|
|
|
2418 {
|
|
|
2419 Atom *existing_atoms = NULL;
|
|
|
2420 int count = 0;
|
|
|
2421
|
|
|
2422 #ifdef USE_XSMP
|
|
|
2423 if (xsmp_icefd != -1)
|
|
|
2424 {
|
|
|
2425 /*
|
|
|
2426 * Use XSMP is preference to legacy WM_SAVE_YOURSELF;
|
|
|
2427 * set up GTK IO monitor
|
|
|
2428 */
|
|
|
2429 GIOChannel *g_io = g_io_channel_unix_new(xsmp_icefd);
|
|
|
2430
|
|
|
2431 g_io_add_watch(g_io, G_IO_IN | G_IO_ERR | G_IO_HUP,
|
|
|
2432 local_xsmp_handle_requests, (gpointer)g_io);
|
|
|
2433 }
|
|
|
2434 else
|
|
|
2435 #endif
|
|
|
2436 {
|
|
|
2437 /* Fall back to old method */
|
|
|
2438
|
|
|
2439 /* first get the existing value */
|
|
|
2440 if (XGetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2441 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2442 &existing_atoms, &count))
|
|
|
2443 {
|
|
|
2444 Atom *new_atoms;
|
|
|
2445 Atom save_yourself_xatom;
|
|
|
2446 int i;
|
|
|
2447
|
|
|
2448 save_yourself_xatom = GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom);
|
|
|
2449
|
|
|
2450 /* check if WM_SAVE_YOURSELF isn't there yet */
|
|
|
2451 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
|
|
|
2452 if (existing_atoms[i] == save_yourself_xatom)
|
|
|
2453 break;
|
|
|
2454
|
|
|
2455 if (i == count)
|
|
|
2456 {
|
|
|
2457 /* allocate an Atoms array which is one item longer */
|
|
|
2458 new_atoms = (Atom *)alloc((unsigned)((count + 1)
|
|
|
2459 * sizeof(Atom)));
|
|
|
2460 if (new_atoms != NULL)
|
|
|
2461 {
|
|
|
2462 memcpy(new_atoms, existing_atoms, count * sizeof(Atom));
|
|
|
2463 new_atoms[count] = save_yourself_xatom;
|
|
|
2464 XSetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2465 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2466 new_atoms, count + 1);
|
|
|
2467 vim_free(new_atoms);
|
|
|
2468 }
|
|
|
2469 }
|
|
|
2470 XFree(existing_atoms);
|
|
|
2471 }
|
|
|
2472 }
|
|
|
2473 }
|
|
|
2474
|
|
|
2475 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2476 /*
|
|
|
2477 * Installing a global event filter seems to be the only way to catch
|
|
|
2478 * client messages of type WM_PROTOCOLS without overriding GDK's own
|
|
|
2479 * client message event filter. Well, that's still better than trying
|
|
|
2480 * to guess what the GDK filter had done if it had been invoked instead
|
|
|
2481 * (This is what we did for GTK+ 1.2, see below).
|
|
|
2482 *
|
|
|
2483 * GTK2_FIXME: This doesn't seem to work. For some reason we never
|
|
|
2484 * receive WM_SAVE_YOURSELF even though everything is set up correctly.
|
|
|
2485 * I have the nasty feeling modern session managers just don't send this
|
|
|
2486 * deprecated message anymore. Addition: confirmed by several people.
|
|
|
2487 *
|
|
|
2488 * The GNOME session support is much cooler anyway. Unlike this ugly
|
|
|
2489 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF hack it actually stores the session... And yes,
|
|
|
2490 * it should work with KDE as well.
|
|
|
2491 */
|
|
|
2492 static GdkFilterReturn
|
|
1884
|
2493 global_event_filter(GdkXEvent *xev,
|
|
|
2494 GdkEvent *event UNUSED,
|
|
|
2495 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
2496 {
|
|
|
2497 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev;
|
|
|
2498
|
|
|
2499 if (xevent != NULL
|
|
|
2500 && xevent->type == ClientMessage
|
|
|
2501 && xevent->xclient.message_type == GET_X_ATOM(wm_protocols_atom)
|
|
1884
|
2502 && (long_u)xevent->xclient.data.l[0]
|
|
|
2503 == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom))
|
|
7
|
2504 {
|
|
|
2505 out_flush();
|
|
|
2506 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
|
|
|
2507 /*
|
|
|
2508 * Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager
|
|
|
2509 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be
|
|
|
2510 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL.
|
|
|
2511 */
|
|
|
2512 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2513 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2514 NULL, 0);
|
|
|
2515 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE;
|
|
|
2516 }
|
|
|
2517
|
|
|
2518 return GDK_FILTER_CONTINUE;
|
|
|
2519 }
|
|
|
2520
|
|
|
2521 # else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2522
|
|
|
2523 /*
|
|
|
2524 * GDK handler for X ClientMessage events.
|
|
|
2525 */
|
|
|
2526 static GdkFilterReturn
|
|
|
2527 gdk_wm_protocols_filter(GdkXEvent *xev, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2528 {
|
|
|
2529 /* From example in gdkevents.c/gdk_wm_protocols_filter */
|
|
|
2530 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev;
|
|
|
2531
|
|
|
2532 if (xevent != NULL)
|
|
|
2533 {
|
|
|
2534 if (xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom))
|
|
|
2535 {
|
|
|
2536 out_flush();
|
|
|
2537 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
|
|
|
2538
|
|
|
2539 /* Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager
|
|
|
2540 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be
|
|
|
2541 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL. */
|
|
|
2542 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2543 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2544 NULL, 0);
|
|
|
2545 }
|
|
|
2546 /*
|
|
|
2547 * Functionality from gdkevents.c/gdk_wm_protocols_filter;
|
|
|
2548 * Registering this filter apparently overrides the default GDK one,
|
|
|
2549 * so we need to perform its functionality. There seems no way to
|
|
|
2550 * register for WM_PROTOCOLS, and only process the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF
|
|
|
2551 * bit; it's all or nothing. Update: No, there is a way -- but it
|
|
|
2552 * only works with GTK+ 2 apparently. See above.
|
|
|
2553 */
|
|
|
2554 else if (xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(gdk_wm_delete_window))
|
|
|
2555 {
|
|
|
2556 event->any.type = GDK_DELETE;
|
|
|
2557 return GDK_FILTER_TRANSLATE;
|
|
|
2558 }
|
|
|
2559 }
|
|
|
2560
|
|
|
2561 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE;
|
|
|
2562 }
|
|
|
2563 # endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2564
|
|
|
2565 #endif /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */
|
|
|
2566
|
|
|
2567
|
|
|
2568 /*
|
|
|
2569 * Setup the window icon & xcmdsrv comm after the main window has been realized.
|
|
|
2570 */
|
|
|
2571 static void
|
|
1884
|
2572 mainwin_realize(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
2573 {
|
|
|
2574 /* If you get an error message here, you still need to unpack the runtime
|
|
|
2575 * archive! */
|
|
|
2576 #ifdef magick
|
|
|
2577 # undef magick
|
|
|
2578 #endif
|
|
|
2579 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2580 /* A bit hackish, but avoids casting later and allows optimization */
|
|
|
2581 # define static static const
|
|
|
2582 #endif
|
|
|
2583 #define magick vim32x32
|
|
|
2584 #include "../runtime/vim32x32.xpm"
|
|
|
2585 #undef magick
|
|
|
2586 #define magick vim16x16
|
|
|
2587 #include "../runtime/vim16x16.xpm"
|
|
|
2588 #undef magick
|
|
|
2589 #define magick vim48x48
|
|
|
2590 #include "../runtime/vim48x48.xpm"
|
|
|
2591 #undef magick
|
|
|
2592 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2593 # undef static
|
|
|
2594 #endif
|
|
|
2595
|
|
|
2596 /* When started with "--echo-wid" argument, write window ID on stdout. */
|
|
|
2597 if (echo_wid_arg)
|
|
|
2598 {
|
|
|
2599 printf("WID: %ld\n", (long)GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window));
|
|
|
2600 fflush(stdout);
|
|
|
2601 }
|
|
|
2602
|
|
|
2603 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_ICON) != NULL)
|
|
|
2604 {
|
|
|
2605 /*
|
|
|
2606 * Add an icon to the main window. For fun and convenience of the user.
|
|
|
2607 */
|
|
|
2608 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2609 GList *icons = NULL;
|
|
|
2610
|
|
|
2611 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim16x16));
|
|
|
2612 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim32x32));
|
|
|
2613 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim48x48));
|
|
|
2614
|
|
|
2615 gtk_window_set_icon_list(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), icons);
|
|
|
2616
|
|
|
2617 g_list_foreach(icons, (GFunc)&g_object_unref, NULL);
|
|
|
2618 g_list_free(icons);
|
|
|
2619
|
|
|
2620 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2621
|
|
|
2622 GdkPixmap *icon;
|
|
|
2623 GdkBitmap *icon_mask = NULL;
|
|
|
2624 char **magick = vim32x32;
|
|
|
2625 Display *xdisplay;
|
|
|
2626 Window root_window;
|
|
|
2627 XIconSize *size;
|
|
|
2628 int number_sizes;
|
|
|
2629 /*
|
|
|
2630 * Adjust the icon to the preferences of the actual window manager.
|
|
1226
|
2631 * This is once again a workaround for a deficiency in GTK+ 1.2.
|
|
7
|
2632 */
|
|
|
2633 xdisplay = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
2634 root_window = XRootWindow(xdisplay, DefaultScreen(xdisplay));
|
|
|
2635 if (XGetIconSizes(xdisplay, root_window, &size, &number_sizes))
|
|
|
2636 {
|
|
|
2637 if (number_sizes > 0)
|
|
|
2638 {
|
|
|
2639 if (size->max_height >= 48 && size->max_height >= 48)
|
|
|
2640 magick = vim48x48;
|
|
|
2641 else if (size->max_height >= 32 && size->max_height >= 32)
|
|
|
2642 magick = vim32x32;
|
|
|
2643 else if (size->max_height >= 16 && size->max_height >= 16)
|
|
|
2644 magick = vim16x16;
|
|
|
2645 }
|
|
|
2646 XFree(size);
|
|
|
2647 }
|
|
|
2648 icon = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d(gui.mainwin->window,
|
|
|
2649 &icon_mask, NULL, magick);
|
|
|
2650 if (icon != NULL)
|
|
|
2651 /* Note: for some reason gdk_window_set_icon() doesn't acquire
|
|
|
2652 * a reference on the pixmap, thus we _have_ to leak it. */
|
|
|
2653 gdk_window_set_icon(gui.mainwin->window, NULL, icon, icon_mask);
|
|
|
2654
|
|
|
2655 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2656 }
|
|
|
2657
|
|
|
2658 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION))
|
|
|
2659 /* Register a handler for WM_SAVE_YOURSELF with GDK's low-level X I/F */
|
|
|
2660 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2661 gdk_window_add_filter(NULL, &global_event_filter, NULL);
|
|
|
2662 # else
|
|
|
2663 gdk_add_client_message_filter(wm_protocols_atom,
|
|
|
2664 &gdk_wm_protocols_filter, NULL);
|
|
|
2665 # endif
|
|
|
2666 #endif
|
|
|
2667 /* Setup to indicate to the window manager that we want to catch the
|
|
|
2668 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event. For GNOME, this connects to the session
|
|
|
2669 * manager instead. */
|
|
|
2670 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
2671 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
2672 #endif
|
|
|
2673 setup_save_yourself();
|
|
|
2674
|
|
|
2675 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER
|
|
|
2676 if (serverName == NULL && serverDelayedStartName != NULL)
|
|
|
2677 {
|
|
|
2678 /* This is a :gui command in a plain vim with no previous server */
|
|
|
2679 commWindow = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
2680
|
|
|
2681 (void)serverRegisterName(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2682 serverDelayedStartName);
|
|
|
2683 }
|
|
|
2684 else
|
|
|
2685 {
|
|
|
2686 /*
|
|
|
2687 * Cannot handle "XLib-only" windows with gtk event routines, we'll
|
|
|
2688 * have to change the "server" registration to that of the main window
|
|
|
2689 * If we have not registered a name yet, remember the window
|
|
|
2690 */
|
|
|
2691 serverChangeRegisteredWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2692 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window));
|
|
|
2693 }
|
|
|
2694 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK);
|
|
|
2695 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "property_notify_event",
|
|
|
2696 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(property_event), NULL);
|
|
|
2697 #endif
|
|
|
2698 }
|
|
|
2699
|
|
|
2700 static GdkCursor *
|
|
|
2701 create_blank_pointer(void)
|
|
|
2702 {
|
|
|
2703 GdkWindow *root_window = NULL;
|
|
|
2704 GdkPixmap *blank_mask;
|
|
|
2705 GdkCursor *cursor;
|
|
|
2706 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 };
|
|
|
2707 char blank_data[] = { 0x0 };
|
|
|
2708
|
|
|
2709 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
2710 root_window = gtk_widget_get_root_window(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
2711 #endif
|
|
|
2712
|
|
|
2713 /* Create a pseudo blank pointer, which is in fact one pixel by one pixel
|
|
|
2714 * in size. */
|
|
|
2715 blank_mask = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data(root_window, blank_data, 1, 1);
|
|
|
2716 cursor = gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap(blank_mask, blank_mask,
|
|
|
2717 &color, &color, 0, 0);
|
|
|
2718 gdk_bitmap_unref(blank_mask);
|
|
|
2719
|
|
|
2720 return cursor;
|
|
|
2721 }
|
|
|
2722
|
|
|
2723 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
2724 static void
|
|
|
2725 mainwin_screen_changed_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
1884
|
2726 GdkScreen *previous_screen UNUSED,
|
|
|
2727 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
2728 {
|
|
|
2729 if (!gtk_widget_has_screen(widget))
|
|
|
2730 return;
|
|
|
2731
|
|
|
2732 /*
|
|
1226
|
2733 * Recreate the invisible mouse cursor.
|
|
7
|
2734 */
|
|
|
2735 if (gui.blank_pointer != NULL)
|
|
|
2736 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2737
|
|
|
2738 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer();
|
|
|
2739
|
|
|
2740 if (gui.pointer_hidden && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
2741 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2742
|
|
|
2743 /*
|
|
|
2744 * Create a new PangoContext for this screen, and initialize it
|
|
|
2745 * with the current font if necessary.
|
|
|
2746 */
|
|
|
2747 if (gui.text_context != NULL)
|
|
|
2748 g_object_unref(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
2749
|
|
|
2750 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(widget);
|
|
|
2751 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR);
|
|
|
2752
|
|
|
2753 if (gui.norm_font != NULL)
|
|
|
2754 {
|
|
38
|
2755 gui_mch_init_font(p_guifont, FALSE);
|
|
814
|
2756 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, FALSE, RESIZE_BOTH);
|
|
7
|
2757 }
|
|
|
2758 }
|
|
|
2759 #endif /* HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD */
|
|
|
2760
|
|
|
2761 /*
|
|
|
2762 * After the drawing area comes up, we calculate all colors and create the
|
|
|
2763 * dummy blank cursor.
|
|
|
2764 *
|
|
|
2765 * Don't try to set any VIM scrollbar sizes anywhere here. I'm relying on the
|
|
|
2766 * fact that the main VIM engine doesn't take them into account anywhere.
|
|
|
2767 */
|
|
|
2768 static void
|
|
1884
|
2769 drawarea_realize_cb(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
2770 {
|
|
|
2771 GtkWidget *sbar;
|
|
|
2772
|
|
|
2773 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
2774 xim_init();
|
|
|
2775 #endif
|
|
|
2776 gui_mch_new_colors();
|
|
|
2777 gui.text_gc = gdk_gc_new(gui.drawarea->window);
|
|
|
2778
|
|
|
2779 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer();
|
|
|
2780 if (gui.pointer_hidden)
|
|
|
2781 gdk_window_set_cursor(widget->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2782
|
|
|
2783 /* get the actual size of the scrollbars, if they are realized */
|
|
|
2784 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT].id;
|
|
|
2785 if (!sbar || (!gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT]
|
|
|
2786 && firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id))
|
|
|
2787 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id;
|
|
|
2788 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.width)
|
|
|
2789 gui.scrollbar_width = sbar->allocation.width;
|
|
|
2790
|
|
|
2791 sbar = gui.bottom_sbar.id;
|
|
|
2792 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.height)
|
|
|
2793 gui.scrollbar_height = sbar->allocation.height;
|
|
|
2794 }
|
|
|
2795
|
|
|
2796 /*
|
|
|
2797 * Properly clean up on shutdown.
|
|
|
2798 */
|
|
|
2799 static void
|
|
1884
|
2800 drawarea_unrealize_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
2801 {
|
|
|
2802 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */
|
|
|
2803 full_screen = FALSE;
|
|
|
2804
|
|
|
2805 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
2806 im_shutdown();
|
|
|
2807 #endif
|
|
|
2808 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2809 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL)
|
|
|
2810 {
|
|
|
2811 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs);
|
|
|
2812 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL;
|
|
|
2813 }
|
|
|
2814 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL)
|
|
|
2815 {
|
|
|
2816 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font);
|
|
|
2817 gui.ascii_font = NULL;
|
|
|
2818 }
|
|
|
2819 g_object_unref(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
2820 gui.text_context = NULL;
|
|
|
2821
|
|
|
2822 g_object_unref(gui.text_gc);
|
|
|
2823 gui.text_gc = NULL;
|
|
|
2824
|
|
|
2825 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2826 gui.blank_pointer = NULL;
|
|
|
2827 #else
|
|
|
2828 gdk_gc_unref(gui.text_gc);
|
|
|
2829 gui.text_gc = NULL;
|
|
|
2830
|
|
|
2831 gdk_cursor_destroy(gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2832 gui.blank_pointer = NULL;
|
|
|
2833 #endif
|
|
|
2834 }
|
|
|
2835
|
|
|
2836 static void
|
|
1884
|
2837 drawarea_style_set_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
|
2838 GtkStyle *previous_style UNUSED,
|
|
|
2839 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
2840 {
|
|
|
2841 gui_mch_new_colors();
|
|
|
2842 }
|
|
|
2843
|
|
|
2844 /*
|
|
|
2845 * Callback routine for the "delete_event" signal on the toplevel window.
|
|
|
2846 * Tries to vim gracefully, or refuses to exit with changed buffers.
|
|
|
2847 */
|
|
|
2848 static gint
|
|
1884
|
2849 delete_event_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
|
2850 GdkEventAny *event UNUSED,
|
|
|
2851 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
2852 {
|
|
|
2853 gui_shell_closed();
|
|
|
2854 return TRUE;
|
|
|
2855 }
|
|
|
2856
|
|
685
|
2857 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE)
|
|
|
2858 static int
|
|
|
2859 get_item_dimensions(GtkWidget *widget, GtkOrientation orientation)
|
|
|
2860 {
|
|
|
2861 GtkOrientation item_orientation = GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL;
|
|
|
2862
|
|
|
2863 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
2864 if (using_gnome && widget != NULL)
|
|
|
2865 {
|
|
|
2866 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
856
|
2867 GtkWidget *parent;
|
|
685
|
2868 BonoboDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
2869
|
|
791
|
2870 parent = gtk_widget_get_parent(widget);
|
|
856
|
2871 if (G_TYPE_FROM_INSTANCE(parent) == BONOBO_TYPE_DOCK_ITEM)
|
|
|
2872 {
|
|
|
2873 /* Only menu & toolbar are dock items. Could tabline be?
|
|
|
2874 * Seem to be only the 2 defined in GNOME */
|
|
|
2875 widget = parent;
|
|
|
2876 dockitem = BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM(widget);
|
|
|
2877
|
|
|
2878 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating)
|
|
|
2879 return 0;
|
|
|
2880 item_orientation = bonobo_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem);
|
|
|
2881 }
|
|
685
|
2882 # else
|
|
|
2883 GnomeDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
2884
|
|
|
2885 widget = widget->parent;
|
|
|
2886 dockitem = GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(widget);
|
|
|
2887
|
|
|
2888 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating)
|
|
|
2889 return 0;
|
|
|
2890 item_orientation = gnome_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem);
|
|
|
2891 # endif
|
|
|
2892 }
|
|
|
2893 #endif
|
|
|
2894 if (widget != NULL
|
|
|
2895 && item_orientation == orientation
|
|
|
2896 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(widget)
|
|
|
2897 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget))
|
|
|
2898 {
|
|
|
2899 if (orientation == GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL)
|
|
|
2900 return widget->allocation.height;
|
|
|
2901 else
|
|
|
2902 return widget->allocation.width;
|
|
|
2903 }
|
|
|
2904 return 0;
|
|
|
2905 }
|
|
|
2906 #endif
|
|
|
2907
|
|
|
2908 static int
|
|
|
2909 get_menu_tool_width(void)
|
|
|
2910 {
|
|
|
2911 int width = 0;
|
|
|
2912
|
|
|
2913 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME /* these are never vertical without GNOME */
|
|
|
2914 # ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
2915 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL);
|
|
|
2916 # endif
|
|
|
2917 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
2918 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL);
|
|
|
2919 # endif
|
|
|
2920 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE
|
|
782
|
2921 if (gui.tabline != NULL)
|
|
|
2922 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL);
|
|
685
|
2923 # endif
|
|
|
2924 #endif
|
|
|
2925
|
|
|
2926 return width;
|
|
|
2927 }
|
|
|
2928
|
|
|
2929 static int
|
|
|
2930 get_menu_tool_height(void)
|
|
|
2931 {
|
|
|
2932 int height = 0;
|
|
|
2933
|
|
|
2934 #ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
2935 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
|
|
|
2936 #endif
|
|
|
2937 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
2938 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
|
|
|
2939 #endif
|
|
|
2940 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE
|
|
782
|
2941 if (gui.tabline != NULL)
|
|
|
2942 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
|
|
685
|
2943 #endif
|
|
|
2944
|
|
|
2945 return height;
|
|
|
2946 }
|
|
|
2947
|
|
791
|
2948 /* This controls whether we can set the real window hints at
|
|
|
2949 * start-up when in a GtkPlug.
|
|
|
2950 * 0 = normal processing (default)
|
|
|
2951 * 1 = init. hints set, no-one's tried to reset since last check
|
|
|
2952 * 2 = init. hints set, attempt made to change hints
|
|
|
2953 */
|
|
|
2954 static int init_window_hints_state = 0;
|
|
|
2955
|
|
685
|
2956 static void
|
|
791
|
2957 update_window_manager_hints(int force_width, int force_height)
|
|
685
|
2958 {
|
|
|
2959 static int old_width = 0;
|
|
|
2960 static int old_height = 0;
|
|
791
|
2961 static int old_min_width = 0;
|
|
|
2962 static int old_min_height = 0;
|
|
685
|
2963 static int old_char_width = 0;
|
|
|
2964 static int old_char_height = 0;
|
|
|
2965
|
|
|
2966 int width;
|
|
|
2967 int height;
|
|
791
|
2968 int min_width;
|
|
|
2969 int min_height;
|
|
|
2970
|
|
|
2971 /* At start-up, don't try to set the hints until the initial
|
|
|
2972 * values have been used (those that dictate our initial size)
|
|
1884
|
2973 * Let forced (i.e., correct) values through always.
|
|
791
|
2974 */
|
|
|
2975 if (!(force_width && force_height) && init_window_hints_state > 0)
|
|
|
2976 {
|
|
856
|
2977 /* Don't do it! */
|
|
|
2978 init_window_hints_state = 2;
|
|
|
2979 return;
|
|
791
|
2980 }
|
|
685
|
2981
|
|
|
2982 /* This also needs to be done when the main window isn't there yet,
|
|
|
2983 * otherwise the hints don't work. */
|
|
|
2984 width = gui_get_base_width();
|
|
|
2985 height = gui_get_base_height();
|
|
|
2986 # ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
2987 height += tabline_height() * gui.char_height;
|
|
|
2988 # endif
|
|
|
2989 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2990 width += get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
2991 height += get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
2992 # endif
|
|
|
2993
|
|
791
|
2994 /* GtkSockets use GtkPlug's [gui,mainwin] min-size hints to determine
|
|
1226
|
2995 * their actual widget size. When we set our size ourselves (e.g.,
|
|
791
|
2996 * 'set columns=' or init. -geom) we briefly set the min. to the size
|
|
|
2997 * we wish to be instead of the legitimate minimum so that we actually
|
|
|
2998 * resize correctly.
|
|
|
2999 */
|
|
|
3000 if (force_width && force_height)
|
|
|
3001 {
|
|
856
|
3002 min_width = force_width;
|
|
|
3003 min_height = force_height;
|
|
791
|
3004 }
|
|
|
3005 else
|
|
|
3006 {
|
|
856
|
3007 min_width = width + MIN_COLUMNS * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
3008 min_height = height + MIN_LINES * gui.char_height;
|
|
791
|
3009 }
|
|
|
3010
|
|
685
|
3011 /* Avoid an expose event when the size didn't change. */
|
|
|
3012 if (width != old_width
|
|
|
3013 || height != old_height
|
|
856
|
3014 || min_width != old_min_width
|
|
791
|
3015 || min_height != old_min_height
|
|
685
|
3016 || gui.char_width != old_char_width
|
|
|
3017 || gui.char_height != old_char_height)
|
|
|
3018 {
|
|
|
3019 GdkGeometry geometry;
|
|
|
3020 GdkWindowHints geometry_mask;
|
|
|
3021
|
|
|
3022 geometry.width_inc = gui.char_width;
|
|
|
3023 geometry.height_inc = gui.char_height;
|
|
|
3024 geometry.base_width = width;
|
|
|
3025 geometry.base_height = height;
|
|
856
|
3026 geometry.min_width = min_width;
|
|
|
3027 geometry.min_height = min_height;
|
|
685
|
3028 geometry_mask = GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE|GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC
|
|
|
3029 |GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE;
|
|
|
3030 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3031 /* Using gui.formwin as geometry widget doesn't work as expected
|
|
|
3032 * with GTK+ 2 -- dunno why. Presumably all the resizing hacks
|
|
|
3033 * in Vim confuse GTK+. */
|
|
|
3034 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.mainwin,
|
|
|
3035 &geometry, geometry_mask);
|
|
|
3036 # else
|
|
|
3037 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.formwin,
|
|
|
3038 &geometry, geometry_mask);
|
|
|
3039 # endif
|
|
856
|
3040 old_width = width;
|
|
|
3041 old_height = height;
|
|
|
3042 old_min_width = min_width;
|
|
|
3043 old_min_height = min_height;
|
|
|
3044 old_char_width = gui.char_width;
|
|
|
3045 old_char_height = gui.char_height;
|
|
685
|
3046 }
|
|
|
3047 }
|
|
|
3048
|
|
7
|
3049 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3050
|
|
|
3051 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3052 /*
|
|
|
3053 * This extra effort wouldn't be necessary if we only used stock icons in the
|
|
|
3054 * toolbar, as we do for all builtin icons. But user-defined toolbar icons
|
|
|
3055 * shouldn't be treated differently, thus we do need this.
|
|
|
3056 */
|
|
|
3057 static void
|
|
|
3058 icon_size_changed_foreach(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
3059 {
|
|
|
3060 if (GTK_IS_IMAGE(widget))
|
|
|
3061 {
|
|
|
3062 GtkImage *image = (GtkImage *)widget;
|
|
|
3063
|
|
|
3064 /* User-defined icons are stored in a GtkIconSet */
|
|
|
3065 if (gtk_image_get_storage_type(image) == GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET)
|
|
|
3066 {
|
|
|
3067 GtkIconSet *icon_set;
|
|
|
3068 GtkIconSize icon_size;
|
|
|
3069
|
|
|
3070 gtk_image_get_icon_set(image, &icon_set, &icon_size);
|
|
|
3071 icon_size = (GtkIconSize)(long)user_data;
|
|
|
3072
|
|
|
3073 gtk_icon_set_ref(icon_set);
|
|
|
3074 gtk_image_set_from_icon_set(image, icon_set, icon_size);
|
|
|
3075 gtk_icon_set_unref(icon_set);
|
|
|
3076 }
|
|
|
3077 }
|
|
|
3078 else if (GTK_IS_CONTAINER(widget))
|
|
|
3079 {
|
|
|
3080 gtk_container_foreach((GtkContainer *)widget,
|
|
|
3081 &icon_size_changed_foreach,
|
|
|
3082 user_data);
|
|
|
3083 }
|
|
|
3084 }
|
|
|
3085 # endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
3086
|
|
|
3087 static void
|
|
|
3088 set_toolbar_style(GtkToolbar *toolbar)
|
|
|
3089 {
|
|
|
3090 GtkToolbarStyle style;
|
|
|
3091 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3092 GtkIconSize size;
|
|
|
3093 GtkIconSize oldsize;
|
|
|
3094 # endif
|
|
|
3095
|
|
|
3096 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3097 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ))
|
|
|
3098 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ))
|
|
|
3099 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ;
|
|
|
3100 else
|
|
|
3101 # endif
|
|
|
3102 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))
|
|
|
3103 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))
|
|
|
3104 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH;
|
|
|
3105 else if (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TEXT)
|
|
|
3106 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_TEXT;
|
|
|
3107 else
|
|
|
3108 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS;
|
|
|
3109
|
|
|
3110 gtk_toolbar_set_style(toolbar, style);
|
|
|
3111 gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips(toolbar, (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TOOLTIPS) != 0);
|
|
|
3112
|
|
|
3113 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3114 switch (tbis_flags)
|
|
|
3115 {
|
|
|
3116 case TBIS_TINY: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU; break;
|
|
|
3117 case TBIS_SMALL: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR; break;
|
|
|
3118 case TBIS_MEDIUM: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON; break;
|
|
|
3119 case TBIS_LARGE: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR; break;
|
|
|
3120 default: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID; break;
|
|
|
3121 }
|
|
|
3122 oldsize = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar);
|
|
|
3123
|
|
|
3124 if (size == GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID)
|
|
|
3125 {
|
|
|
3126 /* Let global user preferences decide the icon size. */
|
|
|
3127 gtk_toolbar_unset_icon_size(toolbar);
|
|
|
3128 size = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar);
|
|
|
3129 }
|
|
|
3130 if (size != oldsize)
|
|
|
3131 {
|
|
|
3132 gtk_container_foreach(GTK_CONTAINER(toolbar),
|
|
|
3133 &icon_size_changed_foreach,
|
|
|
3134 GINT_TO_POINTER((int)size));
|
|
|
3135 }
|
|
|
3136 gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size(toolbar, size);
|
|
|
3137 # endif
|
|
|
3138 }
|
|
|
3139
|
|
|
3140 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */
|
|
|
3141
|
|
685
|
3142 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
3143 static int ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE;
|
|
689
|
3144 static GtkWidget *tabline_menu;
|
|
846
|
3145 static GtkTooltips *tabline_tooltip;
|
|
689
|
3146 static int clicked_page; /* page clicked in tab line */
|
|
|
3147
|
|
|
3148 /*
|
|
|
3149 * Handle selecting an item in the tab line popup menu.
|
|
|
3150 */
|
|
|
3151 static void
|
|
1884
|
3152 tabline_menu_handler(GtkMenuItem *item UNUSED, gpointer user_data)
|
|
689
|
3153 {
|
|
|
3154 /* Add the string cmd into input buffer */
|
|
824
|
3155 send_tabline_menu_event(clicked_page, (int)(long)user_data);
|
|
689
|
3156
|
|
|
3157 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
3158 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
3159 }
|
|
|
3160
|
|
851
|
3161 static void
|
|
|
3162 add_tabline_menu_item(GtkWidget *menu, char_u *text, int resp)
|
|
|
3163 {
|
|
|
3164 GtkWidget *item;
|
|
|
3165 char_u *utf_text;
|
|
|
3166
|
|
|
3167 utf_text = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(text);
|
|
|
3168 item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label((const char *)utf_text);
|
|
|
3169 gtk_widget_show(item);
|
|
|
3170 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(utf_text);
|
|
|
3171
|
|
|
3172 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(menu), item);
|
|
|
3173 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(item), "activate",
|
|
|
3174 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(tabline_menu_handler),
|
|
1660
|
3175 (gpointer)(long)resp);
|
|
851
|
3176 }
|
|
|
3177
|
|
689
|
3178 /*
|
|
|
3179 * Create a menu for the tab line.
|
|
|
3180 */
|
|
|
3181 static GtkWidget *
|
|
|
3182 create_tabline_menu(void)
|
|
|
3183 {
|
|
851
|
3184 GtkWidget *menu;
|
|
689
|
3185
|
|
|
3186 menu = gtk_menu_new();
|
|
851
|
3187 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("Close"), TABLINE_MENU_CLOSE);
|
|
|
3188 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("New tab"), TABLINE_MENU_NEW);
|
|
|
3189 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("Open Tab..."), TABLINE_MENU_OPEN);
|
|
689
|
3190
|
|
|
3191 return menu;
|
|
|
3192 }
|
|
|
3193
|
|
|
3194 static gboolean
|
|
|
3195 on_tabline_menu(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event)
|
|
|
3196 {
|
|
|
3197 /* Was this button press event ? */
|
|
|
3198 if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS)
|
|
|
3199 {
|
|
|
3200 GdkEventButton *bevent = (GdkEventButton *)event;
|
|
|
3201 int x = bevent->x;
|
|
851
|
3202 int y = bevent->y;
|
|
|
3203 GtkWidget *tabwidget;
|
|
|
3204 GdkWindow *tabwin;
|
|
689
|
3205
|
|
844
|
3206 /* When ignoring events return TRUE so that the selected page doesn't
|
|
|
3207 * change. */
|
|
|
3208 if (hold_gui_events
|
|
|
3209 # ifdef FEAT_CMDWIN
|
|
|
3210 || cmdwin_type != 0
|
|
|
3211 # endif
|
|
|
3212 )
|
|
|
3213 return TRUE;
|
|
|
3214
|
|
851
|
3215 tabwin = gdk_window_at_pointer(&x, &y);
|
|
|
3216 gdk_window_get_user_data(tabwin, (gpointer)&tabwidget);
|
|
|
3217 clicked_page = (int)(long)gtk_object_get_user_data(
|
|
|
3218 GTK_OBJECT(tabwidget));
|
|
689
|
3219
|
|
|
3220 /* If the event was generated for 3rd button popup the menu. */
|
|
|
3221 if (bevent->button == 3)
|
|
|
3222 {
|
|
|
3223 gtk_menu_popup(GTK_MENU(widget), NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL,
|
|
|
3224 bevent->button, bevent->time);
|
|
|
3225 /* We handled the event. */
|
|
|
3226 return TRUE;
|
|
|
3227 }
|
|
868
|
3228 else if (bevent->button == 1)
|
|
693
|
3229 {
|
|
868
|
3230 if (clicked_page == 0)
|
|
|
3231 {
|
|
1394
|
3232 /* Click after all tabs moves to next tab page. When "x" is
|
|
|
3233 * small guess it's the left button. */
|
|
|
3234 if (send_tabline_event(x < 50 ? -1 : 0) && gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
868
|
3235 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
3236 }
|
|
|
3237 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3238 else
|
|
|
3239 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline),
|
|
|
3240 clicked_page - 1);
|
|
|
3241 #endif
|
|
693
|
3242 }
|
|
689
|
3243 }
|
|
844
|
3244
|
|
689
|
3245 /* We didn't handle the event. */
|
|
|
3246 return FALSE;
|
|
|
3247 }
|
|
685
|
3248
|
|
|
3249 /*
|
|
|
3250 * Handle selecting one of the tabs.
|
|
|
3251 */
|
|
|
3252 static void
|
|
|
3253 on_select_tab(
|
|
1884
|
3254 GtkNotebook *notebook UNUSED,
|
|
|
3255 GtkNotebookPage *page UNUSED,
|
|
944
|
3256 gint idx,
|
|
1884
|
3257 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
685
|
3258 {
|
|
|
3259 if (!ignore_tabline_evt)
|
|
693
|
3260 {
|
|
944
|
3261 if (send_tabline_event(idx + 1) && gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
693
|
3262 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
3263 }
|
|
685
|
3264 }
|
|
|
3265
|
|
714
|
3266 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3267 static int showing_tabline = 0;
|
|
|
3268 #endif
|
|
|
3269
|
|
685
|
3270 /*
|
|
|
3271 * Show or hide the tabline.
|
|
|
3272 */
|
|
|
3273 void
|
|
|
3274 gui_mch_show_tabline(int showit)
|
|
|
3275 {
|
|
|
3276 if (gui.tabline == NULL)
|
|
|
3277 return;
|
|
|
3278
|
|
714
|
3279 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3280 /* gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs does not exist in gtk+-1.2.10 */
|
|
685
|
3281 if (!showit != !gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)))
|
|
714
|
3282 #else
|
|
|
3283 if (!showit != !showing_tabline)
|
|
|
3284 #endif
|
|
685
|
3285 {
|
|
708
|
3286 /* Note: this may cause a resize event */
|
|
685
|
3287 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), showit);
|
|
791
|
3288 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
714
|
3289 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3290 showing_tabline = showit;
|
|
|
3291 #endif
|
|
868
|
3292 if (showit)
|
|
|
3293 GTK_WIDGET_UNSET_FLAGS(GTK_WIDGET(gui.tabline), GTK_CAN_FOCUS);
|
|
|
3294 }
|
|
|
3295
|
|
|
3296 gui_mch_update();
|
|
685
|
3297 }
|
|
|
3298
|
|
|
3299 /*
|
|
708
|
3300 * Return TRUE when tabline is displayed.
|
|
|
3301 */
|
|
|
3302 int
|
|
|
3303 gui_mch_showing_tabline(void)
|
|
|
3304 {
|
|
|
3305 return gui.tabline != NULL
|
|
714
|
3306 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3307 /* gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs does not exist in gtk+-1.2.10 */
|
|
|
3308 && gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline))
|
|
|
3309 #else
|
|
|
3310 && showing_tabline
|
|
|
3311 #endif
|
|
|
3312 ;
|
|
708
|
3313 }
|
|
|
3314
|
|
|
3315 /*
|
|
685
|
3316 * Update the labels of the tabline.
|
|
|
3317 */
|
|
|
3318 void
|
|
|
3319 gui_mch_update_tabline(void)
|
|
|
3320 {
|
|
|
3321 GtkWidget *page;
|
|
846
|
3322 GtkWidget *event_box;
|
|
685
|
3323 GtkWidget *label;
|
|
|
3324 tabpage_T *tp;
|
|
|
3325 int nr = 0;
|
|
851
|
3326 int tab_num;
|
|
685
|
3327 int curtabidx = 0;
|
|
836
|
3328 char_u *labeltext;
|
|
685
|
3329
|
|
|
3330 if (gui.tabline == NULL)
|
|
|
3331 return;
|
|
|
3332
|
|
|
3333 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE;
|
|
|
3334
|
|
|
3335 /* Add a label for each tab page. They all contain the same text area. */
|
|
|
3336 for (tp = first_tabpage; tp != NULL; tp = tp->tp_next, ++nr)
|
|
|
3337 {
|
|
|
3338 if (tp == curtab)
|
|
|
3339 curtabidx = nr;
|
|
|
3340
|
|
851
|
3341 tab_num = nr + 1;
|
|
|
3342
|
|
685
|
3343 page = gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr);
|
|
|
3344 if (page == NULL)
|
|
|
3345 {
|
|
|
3346 /* Add notebook page */
|
|
|
3347 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3348 gtk_widget_show(page);
|
|
846
|
3349 event_box = gtk_event_box_new();
|
|
|
3350 gtk_widget_show(event_box);
|
|
685
|
3351 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-");
|
|
851
|
3352 gtk_misc_set_padding(GTK_MISC(label), 2, 2);
|
|
846
|
3353 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), label);
|
|
685
|
3354 gtk_widget_show(label);
|
|
|
3355 gtk_notebook_insert_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline),
|
|
|
3356 page,
|
|
846
|
3357 event_box,
|
|
685
|
3358 nr++);
|
|
|
3359 }
|
|
|
3360
|
|
846
|
3361 event_box = gtk_notebook_get_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page);
|
|
1660
|
3362 gtk_object_set_user_data(GTK_OBJECT(event_box),
|
|
|
3363 (gpointer)(long)tab_num);
|
|
846
|
3364 label = GTK_BIN(event_box)->child;
|
|
839
|
3365 get_tabline_label(tp, FALSE);
|
|
836
|
3366 labeltext = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(NameBuff);
|
|
846
|
3367 gtk_label_set_text(GTK_LABEL(label), (const char *)labeltext);
|
|
836
|
3368 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(labeltext);
|
|
846
|
3369
|
|
|
3370 get_tabline_label(tp, TRUE);
|
|
|
3371 labeltext = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(NameBuff);
|
|
|
3372 gtk_tooltips_set_tip(GTK_TOOLTIPS(tabline_tooltip), event_box,
|
|
|
3373 (const char *)labeltext, NULL);
|
|
|
3374 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(labeltext);
|
|
685
|
3375 }
|
|
|
3376
|
|
|
3377 /* Remove any old labels. */
|
|
|
3378 while (gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr) != NULL)
|
|
|
3379 gtk_notebook_remove_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr);
|
|
|
3380
|
|
|
3381 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != curtabidx)
|
|
856
|
3382 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), curtabidx);
|
|
685
|
3383
|
|
851
|
3384 /* Make sure everything is in place before drawing text. */
|
|
|
3385 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
3386
|
|
685
|
3387 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE;
|
|
|
3388 }
|
|
|
3389
|
|
|
3390 /*
|
|
|
3391 * Set the current tab to "nr". First tab is 1.
|
|
|
3392 */
|
|
|
3393 void
|
|
|
3394 gui_mch_set_curtab(nr)
|
|
|
3395 int nr;
|
|
|
3396 {
|
|
|
3397 if (gui.tabline == NULL)
|
|
|
3398 return;
|
|
|
3399
|
|
|
3400 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE;
|
|
|
3401 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != nr - 1)
|
|
856
|
3402 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr - 1);
|
|
685
|
3403 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE;
|
|
|
3404 }
|
|
|
3405
|
|
|
3406 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */
|
|
|
3407
|
|
7
|
3408 /*
|
|
|
3409 * Initialize the GUI. Create all the windows, set up all the callbacks etc.
|
|
|
3410 * Returns OK for success, FAIL when the GUI can't be started.
|
|
|
3411 */
|
|
|
3412 int
|
|
|
3413 gui_mch_init(void)
|
|
|
3414 {
|
|
|
3415 GtkWidget *vbox;
|
|
|
3416
|
|
|
3417 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3418 /* Initialize the GNOME libraries. gnome_program_init()/gnome_init()
|
|
|
3419 * exits on failure, but that's a non-issue because we already called
|
|
|
3420 * gtk_init_check() in gui_mch_init_check(). */
|
|
|
3421 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3422 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3423 gnome_program_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT,
|
|
|
3424 LIBGNOMEUI_MODULE, gui_argc, gui_argv, NULL);
|
|
|
3425 # else
|
|
|
3426 gnome_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT, gui_argc, gui_argv);
|
|
|
3427 # endif
|
|
|
3428 #endif
|
|
|
3429 vim_free(gui_argv);
|
|
|
3430 gui_argv = NULL;
|
|
|
3431
|
|
|
3432 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3433 # if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,3)
|
|
|
3434 /* Set the human-readable application name */
|
|
|
3435 g_set_application_name("Vim");
|
|
|
3436 # endif
|
|
|
3437 /*
|
|
|
3438 * Force UTF-8 output no matter what the value of 'encoding' is.
|
|
|
3439 * did_set_string_option() in option.c prohibits changing 'termencoding'
|
|
|
3440 * to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is in use.
|
|
|
3441 */
|
|
|
3442 set_option_value((char_u *)"termencoding", 0L, (char_u *)"utf-8", 0);
|
|
|
3443
|
|
|
3444 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3445 gui_gtk_register_stock_icons();
|
|
|
3446 # endif
|
|
|
3447 /* FIXME: Need to install the classic icons and a gtkrc.classic file.
|
|
|
3448 * The hard part is deciding install locations and the Makefile magic. */
|
|
|
3449 # if 0
|
|
|
3450 gtk_rc_parse("gtkrc");
|
|
|
3451 # endif
|
|
|
3452 #endif
|
|
|
3453
|
|
|
3454 /* Initialize values */
|
|
|
3455 gui.border_width = 2;
|
|
|
3456 gui.scrollbar_width = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH;
|
|
|
3457 gui.scrollbar_height = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH;
|
|
136
|
3458 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */
|
|
7
|
3459 gui.fgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1);
|
|
136
|
3460 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */
|
|
7
|
3461 gui.bgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1);
|
|
207
|
3462 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */
|
|
|
3463 gui.spcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1);
|
|
7
|
3464
|
|
|
3465 /* Initialise atoms */
|
|
|
3466 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
3467 utf8_string_atom = gdk_atom_intern("UTF8_STRING", FALSE);
|
|
|
3468 #endif
|
|
|
3469 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3470 compound_text_atom = gdk_atom_intern("COMPOUND_TEXT", FALSE);
|
|
|
3471 text_atom = gdk_atom_intern("TEXT", FALSE);
|
|
|
3472 #endif
|
|
|
3473
|
|
|
3474 /* Set default foreground and background colors. */
|
|
|
3475 gui.norm_pixel = gui.def_norm_pixel;
|
|
|
3476 gui.back_pixel = gui.def_back_pixel;
|
|
|
3477
|
|
|
3478 if (gtk_socket_id != 0)
|
|
|
3479 {
|
|
|
3480 GtkWidget *plug;
|
|
|
3481
|
|
|
3482 /* Use GtkSocket from another app. */
|
|
|
3483 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
3484 plug = gtk_plug_new_for_display(gdk_display_get_default(),
|
|
|
3485 gtk_socket_id);
|
|
|
3486 #else
|
|
|
3487 plug = gtk_plug_new(gtk_socket_id);
|
|
|
3488 #endif
|
|
|
3489 if (plug != NULL && GTK_PLUG(plug)->socket_window != NULL)
|
|
|
3490 {
|
|
|
3491 gui.mainwin = plug;
|
|
|
3492 }
|
|
|
3493 else
|
|
|
3494 {
|
|
|
3495 g_warning("Connection to GTK+ socket (ID %u) failed",
|
|
|
3496 (unsigned int)gtk_socket_id);
|
|
|
3497 /* Pretend we never wanted it if it failed (get own window) */
|
|
|
3498 gtk_socket_id = 0;
|
|
|
3499 }
|
|
|
3500 }
|
|
|
3501
|
|
|
3502 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
3503 {
|
|
|
3504 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3505 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3506 {
|
|
|
3507 gui.mainwin = gnome_app_new("Vim", NULL);
|
|
|
3508 # ifdef USE_XSMP
|
|
|
3509 /* Use the GNOME save-yourself functionality now. */
|
|
|
3510 xsmp_close();
|
|
|
3511 # endif
|
|
|
3512 }
|
|
|
3513 else
|
|
|
3514 #endif
|
|
|
3515 gui.mainwin = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
|
|
|
3516 }
|
|
|
3517
|
|
|
3518 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.mainwin, "vim-main-window");
|
|
|
3519
|
|
|
3520 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3521 /* Create the PangoContext used for drawing all text. */
|
|
|
3522 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
3523 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR);
|
|
|
3524 #endif
|
|
|
3525
|
|
|
3526 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3527 gtk_window_set_policy(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), TRUE, TRUE, TRUE);
|
|
|
3528 #endif
|
|
|
3529 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), 0);
|
|
|
3530 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK);
|
|
|
3531
|
|
|
3532 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "delete_event",
|
|
|
3533 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&delete_event_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3534
|
|
|
3535 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "realize",
|
|
|
3536 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&mainwin_realize), NULL);
|
|
|
3537 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
3538 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "screen_changed",
|
|
|
3539 G_CALLBACK(&mainwin_screen_changed_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3540 #endif
|
|
|
3541 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3542 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_new();
|
|
|
3543 gtk_window_add_accel_group(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.accel_group);
|
|
|
3544 #else
|
|
|
3545 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_get_default();
|
|
|
3546 #endif
|
|
|
3547
|
|
685
|
3548 /* A vertical box holds the menubar, toolbar and main text window. */
|
|
7
|
3549 vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3550
|
|
|
3551 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3552 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3553 {
|
|
|
3554 # if defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU)
|
|
|
3555 /* automagically restore menubar/toolbar placement */
|
|
|
3556 gnome_app_enable_layout_config(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), TRUE);
|
|
|
3557 # endif
|
|
|
3558 gnome_app_set_contents(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), vbox);
|
|
|
3559 }
|
|
|
3560 else
|
|
|
3561 #endif
|
|
|
3562 {
|
|
|
3563 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), vbox);
|
|
|
3564 gtk_widget_show(vbox);
|
|
|
3565 }
|
|
|
3566
|
|
|
3567 #ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
3568 /*
|
|
|
3569 * Create the menubar and handle
|
|
|
3570 */
|
|
|
3571 gui.menubar = gtk_menu_bar_new();
|
|
|
3572 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.menubar, "vim-menubar");
|
|
|
3573
|
|
36
|
3574 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3575 /* Avoid that GTK takes <F10> away from us. */
|
|
|
3576 {
|
|
|
3577 GtkSettings *gtk_settings;
|
|
|
3578
|
|
|
3579 gtk_settings = gtk_settings_get_for_screen(gdk_screen_get_default());
|
|
|
3580 g_object_set(gtk_settings, "gtk-menu-bar-accel", NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
3581 }
|
|
|
3582 # endif
|
|
|
3583
|
|
|
3584
|
|
7
|
3585 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3586 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3587 {
|
|
|
3588 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3589 BonoboDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
3590
|
|
|
3591 gnome_app_set_menus(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_MENU_BAR(gui.menubar));
|
|
|
3592 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin),
|
|
|
3593 GNOME_APP_MENUBAR_NAME);
|
|
798
|
3594 /* We don't want the menu to float. */
|
|
|
3595 bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem,
|
|
|
3596 bonobo_dock_item_get_behavior(dockitem)
|
|
|
3597 | BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING);
|
|
7
|
3598 gui.menubar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem);
|
|
|
3599 # else
|
|
|
3600 gui.menubar_h = gnome_dock_item_new("VimMainMenu",
|
|
|
3601 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE |
|
|
|
3602 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_VERTICAL);
|
|
|
3603 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.menubar_h), gui.menubar);
|
|
|
3604
|
|
|
3605 gnome_dock_add_item(GNOME_DOCK(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin)->dock),
|
|
|
3606 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(gui.menubar_h),
|
|
|
3607 GNOME_DOCK_TOP, /* placement */
|
|
|
3608 1, /* band_num */
|
|
|
3609 0, /* band_position */
|
|
|
3610 0, /* offset */
|
|
|
3611 TRUE);
|
|
|
3612 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar);
|
|
|
3613 # endif
|
|
|
3614 }
|
|
|
3615 else
|
|
|
3616 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */
|
|
|
3617 {
|
|
827
|
3618 /* Always show the menubar, otherwise <F10> doesn't work. It may be
|
|
|
3619 * disabled in gui_init() later. */
|
|
|
3620 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar);
|
|
7
|
3621 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.menubar, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3622 }
|
|
|
3623 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */
|
|
|
3624
|
|
|
3625 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3626 /*
|
|
|
3627 * Create the toolbar and handle
|
|
|
3628 */
|
|
|
3629 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3630 /* some aesthetics on the toolbar */
|
|
|
3631 gtk_rc_parse_string(
|
|
|
3632 "style \"vim-toolbar-style\" {\n"
|
|
|
3633 " GtkToolbar::button_relief = GTK_RELIEF_NONE\n"
|
|
|
3634 "}\n"
|
|
|
3635 "widget \"*.vim-toolbar\" style \"vim-toolbar-style\"\n");
|
|
|
3636 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new();
|
|
|
3637 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.toolbar, "vim-toolbar");
|
|
|
3638 # else
|
|
|
3639 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new(GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL,
|
|
|
3640 GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS);
|
|
|
3641 gtk_toolbar_set_button_relief(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar), GTK_RELIEF_NONE);
|
|
|
3642 # endif
|
|
|
3643 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
3644
|
|
|
3645 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3646 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3647 {
|
|
|
3648 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3649 BonoboDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
3650
|
|
|
3651 gnome_app_set_toolbar(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
3652 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin),
|
|
|
3653 GNOME_APP_TOOLBAR_NAME);
|
|
|
3654 gui.toolbar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem);
|
|
795
|
3655 /* When the toolbar is floating it gets stuck. So long as that isn't
|
|
798
|
3656 * fixed let's disallow floating. */
|
|
795
|
3657 bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem,
|
|
798
|
3658 bonobo_dock_item_get_behavior(dockitem)
|
|
|
3659 | BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING);
|
|
7
|
3660 gtk_container_set_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 0);
|
|
|
3661 # else
|
|
|
3662 GtkWidget *dockitem;
|
|
|
3663
|
|
|
3664 dockitem = gnome_dock_item_new("VimToolBar",
|
|
|
3665 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE);
|
|
|
3666 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(dockitem), GTK_WIDGET(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
3667 gui.toolbar_h = dockitem;
|
|
|
3668
|
|
|
3669 gnome_dock_add_item(GNOME_DOCK(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin)->dock),
|
|
|
3670 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(dockitem),
|
|
|
3671 GNOME_DOCK_TOP, /* placement */
|
|
|
3672 1, /* band_num */
|
|
|
3673 1, /* band_position */
|
|
|
3674 0, /* offset */
|
|
|
3675 TRUE);
|
|
|
3676 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 2);
|
|
|
3677 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar);
|
|
|
3678 # endif
|
|
|
3679 }
|
|
|
3680 else
|
|
|
3681 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */
|
|
|
3682 {
|
|
|
3683 # ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3684 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 1);
|
|
|
3685 # endif
|
|
|
3686 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) != NULL
|
|
|
3687 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)))
|
|
|
3688 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar);
|
|
|
3689 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.toolbar, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3690 }
|
|
|
3691 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */
|
|
|
3692
|
|
685
|
3693 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE
|
|
782
|
3694 /*
|
|
|
3695 * Use a Notebook for the tab pages labels. The labels are hidden by
|
|
|
3696 * default.
|
|
|
3697 */
|
|
791
|
3698 gui.tabline = gtk_notebook_new();
|
|
|
3699 gtk_widget_show(gui.tabline);
|
|
|
3700 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.tabline, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3701 gtk_notebook_set_show_border(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE);
|
|
|
3702 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE);
|
|
841
|
3703 gtk_notebook_set_scrollable(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), TRUE);
|
|
868
|
3704 gtk_notebook_set_tab_border(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE);
|
|
791
|
3705
|
|
846
|
3706 tabline_tooltip = gtk_tooltips_new();
|
|
|
3707 gtk_tooltips_enable(GTK_TOOLTIPS(tabline_tooltip));
|
|
|
3708
|
|
|
3709 {
|
|
|
3710 GtkWidget *page, *label, *event_box;
|
|
791
|
3711
|
|
856
|
3712 /* Add the first tab. */
|
|
846
|
3713 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3714 gtk_widget_show(page);
|
|
|
3715 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.tabline), page);
|
|
|
3716 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-");
|
|
|
3717 gtk_widget_show(label);
|
|
|
3718 event_box = gtk_event_box_new();
|
|
|
3719 gtk_widget_show(event_box);
|
|
1660
|
3720 gtk_object_set_user_data(GTK_OBJECT(event_box), (gpointer)1L);
|
|
851
|
3721 gtk_misc_set_padding(GTK_MISC(label), 2, 2);
|
|
846
|
3722 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), label);
|
|
|
3723 gtk_notebook_set_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page, event_box);
|
|
791
|
3724 }
|
|
865
|
3725
|
|
791
|
3726 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "switch_page",
|
|
856
|
3727 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_select_tab), NULL);
|
|
791
|
3728
|
|
|
3729 /* Create a popup menu for the tab line and connect it. */
|
|
|
3730 tabline_menu = create_tabline_menu();
|
|
|
3731 gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "button_press_event",
|
|
856
|
3732 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_tabline_menu), GTK_OBJECT(tabline_menu));
|
|
685
|
3733 #endif
|
|
|
3734
|
|
7
|
3735 gui.formwin = gtk_form_new();
|
|
|
3736 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.formwin), 0);
|
|
|
3737 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.formwin, GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK);
|
|
|
3738
|
|
|
3739 gui.drawarea = gtk_drawing_area_new();
|
|
|
3740
|
|
|
3741 /* Determine which events we will filter. */
|
|
|
3742 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
3743 GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK |
|
|
|
3744 GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK |
|
|
|
3745 GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK |
|
|
|
3746 GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK |
|
|
|
3747 GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK |
|
|
|
3748 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3749 GDK_SCROLL_MASK |
|
|
|
3750 #endif
|
|
|
3751 GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK |
|
|
|
3752 GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK |
|
|
|
3753 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK |
|
|
|
3754 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK);
|
|
|
3755
|
|
|
3756 gtk_widget_show(gui.drawarea);
|
|
|
3757 gtk_form_put(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), gui.drawarea, 0, 0);
|
|
|
3758 gtk_widget_show(gui.formwin);
|
|
|
3759 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.formwin, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
|
|
|
3760
|
|
|
3761 /* For GtkSockets, key-presses must go to the focus widget (drawarea)
|
|
|
3762 * and not the window. */
|
|
|
3763 gtk_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin)
|
|
|
3764 : GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
3765 "key_press_event",
|
|
|
3766 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(key_press_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3767 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(HAVE_GTK2)
|
|
|
3768 /* Also forward key release events for the benefit of GTK+ 2 input
|
|
|
3769 * modules. Try CTRL-SHIFT-xdigits to enter a Unicode code point. */
|
|
|
3770 g_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin)
|
|
|
3771 : G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
3772 "key_release_event",
|
|
|
3773 G_CALLBACK(&key_release_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3774 #endif
|
|
|
3775 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "realize",
|
|
|
3776 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_realize_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3777 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "unrealize",
|
|
|
3778 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_unrealize_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3779
|
|
|
3780 gtk_signal_connect_after(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "style_set",
|
|
|
3781 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&drawarea_style_set_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3782
|
|
|
3783 gui.visibility = GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED;
|
|
|
3784
|
|
|
3785 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION))
|
|
|
3786 wm_protocols_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_PROTOCOLS", FALSE);
|
|
|
3787 save_yourself_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_SAVE_YOURSELF", FALSE);
|
|
|
3788 #endif
|
|
|
3789
|
|
|
3790 if (gtk_socket_id != 0)
|
|
1884
|
3791 /* make sure keyboard input can go to the drawarea */
|
|
7
|
3792 GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS(gui.drawarea, GTK_CAN_FOCUS);
|
|
|
3793
|
|
|
3794 /*
|
|
|
3795 * Set clipboard specific atoms
|
|
|
3796 */
|
|
|
3797 vim_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIM_ATOM_NAME, FALSE);
|
|
|
3798 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
3799 vimenc_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, FALSE);
|
|
|
3800 #endif
|
|
|
3801 clip_star.gtk_sel_atom = GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY;
|
|
|
3802 clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom = gdk_atom_intern("CLIPBOARD", FALSE);
|
|
|
3803
|
|
|
3804 /*
|
|
|
3805 * Start out by adding the configured border width into the border offset.
|
|
|
3806 */
|
|
|
3807 gui.border_offset = gui.border_width;
|
|
|
3808
|
|
|
3809 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "visibility_notify_event",
|
|
|
3810 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(visibility_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3811 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "expose_event",
|
|
|
3812 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(expose_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3813
|
|
|
3814 /*
|
|
|
3815 * Only install these enter/leave callbacks when 'p' in 'guioptions'.
|
|
|
3816 * Only needed for some window managers.
|
|
|
3817 */
|
|
|
3818 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_POINTER) != NULL)
|
|
|
3819 {
|
|
|
3820 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "leave_notify_event",
|
|
|
3821 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(leave_notify_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3822 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "enter_notify_event",
|
|
|
3823 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(enter_notify_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3824 }
|
|
|
3825
|
|
791
|
3826 /* Real windows can get focus ... GtkPlug, being a mere container can't,
|
|
|
3827 * only its widgets. Arguably, this could be common code and we not use
|
|
|
3828 * the window focus at all, but let's be safe.
|
|
|
3829 */
|
|
|
3830 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
3831 {
|
|
856
|
3832 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_out_event",
|
|
|
3833 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3834 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_in_event",
|
|
|
3835 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL);
|
|
791
|
3836 }
|
|
|
3837 else
|
|
|
3838 {
|
|
856
|
3839 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_out_event",
|
|
|
3840 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3841 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_in_event",
|
|
|
3842 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL);
|
|
791
|
3843 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE
|
|
856
|
3844 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_out_event",
|
|
|
3845 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3846 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_in_event",
|
|
|
3847 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL);
|
|
791
|
3848 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */
|
|
|
3849 }
|
|
7
|
3850
|
|
|
3851 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "motion_notify_event",
|
|
|
3852 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(motion_notify_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3853 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_press_event",
|
|
|
3854 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_press_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3855 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_release_event",
|
|
|
3856 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_release_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3857 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3858 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "scroll_event",
|
|
|
3859 G_CALLBACK(&scroll_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3860 #endif
|
|
|
3861
|
|
|
3862 /*
|
|
|
3863 * Add selection handler functions.
|
|
|
3864 */
|
|
|
3865 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_clear_event",
|
|
|
3866 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_clear_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3867 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_received",
|
|
|
3868 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_received_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3869
|
|
|
3870 /*
|
|
|
3871 * Add selection targets for PRIMARY and CLIPBOARD selections.
|
|
|
3872 */
|
|
|
3873 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
3874 (GdkAtom)GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY,
|
|
|
3875 selection_targets, N_SELECTION_TARGETS);
|
|
|
3876 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
3877 (GdkAtom)clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom,
|
|
|
3878 selection_targets, N_SELECTION_TARGETS);
|
|
|
3879
|
|
|
3880 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_get",
|
|
|
3881 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_get_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3882
|
|
|
3883 /* Pretend we don't have input focus, we will get an event if we do. */
|
|
|
3884 gui.in_focus = FALSE;
|
|
|
3885
|
|
|
3886 return OK;
|
|
|
3887 }
|
|
|
3888
|
|
|
3889 #if (defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
3890 /*
|
|
|
3891 * This is called from gui_start() after a fork() has been done.
|
|
|
3892 * We have to tell the session manager our new PID.
|
|
|
3893 */
|
|
|
3894 void
|
|
|
3895 gui_mch_forked(void)
|
|
|
3896 {
|
|
|
3897 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3898 {
|
|
|
3899 GnomeClient *client;
|
|
|
3900
|
|
|
3901 client = gnome_master_client();
|
|
|
3902
|
|
|
3903 if (client != NULL)
|
|
|
3904 gnome_client_set_process_id(client, getpid());
|
|
|
3905 }
|
|
|
3906 }
|
|
|
3907 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION */
|
|
|
3908
|
|
|
3909 /*
|
|
|
3910 * Called when the foreground or background color has been changed.
|
|
|
3911 * This used to change the graphics contexts directly but we are
|
|
|
3912 * currently manipulating them where desired.
|
|
|
3913 */
|
|
|
3914 void
|
|
|
3915 gui_mch_new_colors(void)
|
|
|
3916 {
|
|
|
3917 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
3918 {
|
|
|
3919 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 };
|
|
|
3920
|
|
|
3921 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
3922 gdk_window_set_background(gui.drawarea->window, &color);
|
|
|
3923 }
|
|
|
3924 }
|
|
|
3925
|
|
|
3926 /*
|
|
|
3927 * This signal informs us about the need to rearrange our sub-widgets.
|
|
|
3928 */
|
|
|
3929 static gint
|
|
1884
|
3930 form_configure_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED,
|
|
|
3931 GdkEventConfigure *event,
|
|
|
3932 gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
3933 {
|
|
791
|
3934 int usable_height = event->height;
|
|
|
3935
|
|
|
3936 /* When in a GtkPlug, we can't guarantee valid heights (as a round
|
|
|
3937 * no. of char-heights), so we have to manually sanitise them.
|
|
|
3938 * Widths seem to sort themselves out, don't ask me why.
|
|
|
3939 */
|
|
|
3940 if (gtk_socket_id != 0)
|
|
856
|
3941 usable_height -= (gui.char_height - (gui.char_height/2)); /* sic. */
|
|
791
|
3942
|
|
7
|
3943 gtk_form_freeze(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin));
|
|
791
|
3944 gui_resize_shell(event->width, usable_height);
|
|
7
|
3945 gtk_form_thaw(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin));
|
|
|
3946
|
|
|
3947 return TRUE;
|
|
|
3948 }
|
|
|
3949
|
|
|
3950 /*
|
|
|
3951 * Function called when window already closed.
|
|
|
3952 * We can't do much more here than to trying to preserve what had been done,
|
|
|
3953 * since the window is already inevitably going away.
|
|
|
3954 */
|
|
|
3955 static void
|
|
1884
|
3956 mainwin_destroy_cb(GtkObject *object UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
3957 {
|
|
|
3958 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */
|
|
|
3959 full_screen = FALSE;
|
|
|
3960
|
|
|
3961 gui.mainwin = NULL;
|
|
|
3962 gui.drawarea = NULL;
|
|
|
3963
|
|
|
3964 if (!exiting) /* only do anything if the destroy was unexpected */
|
|
|
3965 {
|
|
419
|
3966 vim_strncpy(IObuff,
|
|
|
3967 (char_u *)_("Vim: Main window unexpectedly destroyed\n"),
|
|
|
3968 IOSIZE - 1);
|
|
7
|
3969 preserve_exit();
|
|
|
3970 }
|
|
|
3971 }
|
|
|
3972
|
|
791
|
3973
|
|
|
3974 /*
|
|
|
3975 * Bit of a hack to ensure we start GtkPlug windows with the correct window
|
|
|
3976 * hints (and thus the required size from -geom), but that after that we
|
|
|
3977 * put the hints back to normal (the actual minimum size) so we may
|
|
|
3978 * subsequently be resized smaller. GtkSocket (the parent end) uses the
|
|
1226
|
3979 * plug's window 'min hints to set *it's* minimum size, but that's also the
|
|
791
|
3980 * only way we have of making ourselves bigger (by set lines/columns).
|
|
|
3981 * Thus set hints at start-up to ensure correct init. size, then a
|
|
|
3982 * second after the final attempt to reset the real minimum hinst (done by
|
|
1226
|
3983 * scrollbar init.), actually do the standard hinst and stop the timer.
|
|
791
|
3984 * We'll not let the default hints be set while this timer's active.
|
|
|
3985 */
|
|
|
3986 static gboolean
|
|
1884
|
3987 check_startup_plug_hints(gpointer data UNUSED)
|
|
791
|
3988 {
|
|
|
3989 if (init_window_hints_state == 1)
|
|
|
3990 {
|
|
856
|
3991 /* Safe to use normal hints now */
|
|
|
3992 init_window_hints_state = 0;
|
|
|
3993 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
|
3994 return FALSE; /* stop timer */
|
|
791
|
3995 }
|
|
|
3996
|
|
|
3997 /* Keep on trying */
|
|
|
3998 init_window_hints_state = 1;
|
|
|
3999 return TRUE;
|
|
|
4000 }
|
|
|
4001
|
|
|
4002
|
|
7
|
4003 /*
|
|
|
4004 * Open the GUI window which was created by a call to gui_mch_init().
|
|
|
4005 */
|
|
|
4006 int
|
|
|
4007 gui_mch_open(void)
|
|
|
4008 {
|
|
|
4009 guicolor_T fg_pixel = INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
4010 guicolor_T bg_pixel = INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
4011
|
|
|
4012 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4013 /*
|
|
|
4014 * Allow setting a window role on the command line, or invent one
|
|
|
4015 * if none was specified. This is mainly useful for GNOME session
|
|
|
4016 * support; allowing the WM to restore window placement.
|
|
|
4017 */
|
|
|
4018 if (role_argument != NULL)
|
|
|
4019 {
|
|
|
4020 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role_argument);
|
|
|
4021 }
|
|
|
4022 else
|
|
|
4023 {
|
|
|
4024 char *role;
|
|
|
4025
|
|
|
4026 /* Invent a unique-enough ID string for the role */
|
|
|
4027 role = g_strdup_printf("vim-%u-%u-%u",
|
|
|
4028 (unsigned)mch_get_pid(),
|
|
|
4029 (unsigned)g_random_int(),
|
|
|
4030 (unsigned)time(NULL));
|
|
|
4031
|
|
|
4032 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role);
|
|
|
4033 g_free(role);
|
|
|
4034 }
|
|
|
4035 #endif
|
|
|
4036
|
|
|
4037 if (gui_win_x != -1 && gui_win_y != -1)
|
|
|
4038 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4039 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui_win_x, gui_win_y);
|
|
|
4040 #else
|
|
|
4041 gtk_widget_set_uposition(gui.mainwin, gui_win_x, gui_win_y);
|
|
|
4042 #endif
|
|
|
4043
|
|
|
4044 /* Determine user specified geometry, if present. */
|
|
|
4045 if (gui.geom != NULL)
|
|
|
4046 {
|
|
|
4047 int mask;
|
|
|
4048 unsigned int w, h;
|
|
|
4049 int x = 0;
|
|
|
4050 int y = 0;
|
|
1426
|
4051 guint pixel_width;
|
|
|
4052 guint pixel_height;
|
|
7
|
4053
|
|
|
4054 mask = XParseGeometry((char *)gui.geom, &x, &y, &w, &h);
|
|
|
4055
|
|
|
4056 if (mask & WidthValue)
|
|
|
4057 Columns = w;
|
|
|
4058 if (mask & HeightValue)
|
|
857
|
4059 {
|
|
1884
|
4060 if (p_window > (long)h - 1 || !option_was_set((char_u *)"window"))
|
|
857
|
4061 p_window = h - 1;
|
|
7
|
4062 Rows = h;
|
|
857
|
4063 }
|
|
1426
|
4064
|
|
|
4065 pixel_width = (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width);
|
|
|
4066 pixel_height = (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height);
|
|
|
4067
|
|
|
4068 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4069 pixel_width += get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
4070 pixel_height += get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
4071 #endif
|
|
|
4072
|
|
7
|
4073 if (mask & (XValue | YValue))
|
|
1426
|
4074 {
|
|
1757
|
4075 int ww, hh;
|
|
|
4076 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(&ww, &hh);
|
|
|
4077 hh += p_ghr + get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
4078 ww += get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
1426
|
4079 if (mask & XNegative)
|
|
1757
|
4080 x += ww - pixel_width;
|
|
1426
|
4081 if (mask & YNegative)
|
|
1757
|
4082 y += hh - pixel_height;
|
|
7
|
4083 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4084 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y);
|
|
|
4085 #else
|
|
|
4086 gtk_widget_set_uposition(gui.mainwin, x, y);
|
|
|
4087 #endif
|
|
1426
|
4088 }
|
|
7
|
4089 vim_free(gui.geom);
|
|
|
4090 gui.geom = NULL;
|
|
791
|
4091
|
|
856
|
4092 /* From now until everyone's stopped trying to set the window hints
|
|
|
4093 * to their correct minimum values, stop them being set as we need
|
|
|
4094 * them to remain at our required size for the parent GtkSocket to
|
|
|
4095 * give us the right initial size.
|
|
|
4096 */
|
|
791
|
4097 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && (mask & WidthValue || mask & HeightValue))
|
|
856
|
4098 {
|
|
|
4099 update_window_manager_hints(pixel_width, pixel_height);
|
|
|
4100 init_window_hints_state = 1;
|
|
|
4101 g_timeout_add(1000, check_startup_plug_hints, NULL);
|
|
|
4102 }
|
|
7
|
4103 }
|
|
|
4104
|
|
|
4105 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin),
|
|
|
4106 (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width),
|
|
|
4107 (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height));
|
|
791
|
4108 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
7
|
4109
|
|
|
4110 if (foreground_argument != NULL)
|
|
|
4111 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)foreground_argument);
|
|
|
4112 if (fg_pixel == INVALCOLOR)
|
|
|
4113 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"Black");
|
|
|
4114
|
|
|
4115 if (background_argument != NULL)
|
|
|
4116 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)background_argument);
|
|
|
4117 if (bg_pixel == INVALCOLOR)
|
|
|
4118 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"White");
|
|
|
4119
|
|
|
4120 if (found_reverse_arg)
|
|
|
4121 {
|
|
|
4122 gui.def_norm_pixel = bg_pixel;
|
|
|
4123 gui.def_back_pixel = fg_pixel;
|
|
|
4124 }
|
|
|
4125 else
|
|
|
4126 {
|
|
|
4127 gui.def_norm_pixel = fg_pixel;
|
|
|
4128 gui.def_back_pixel = bg_pixel;
|
|
|
4129 }
|
|
|
4130
|
|
|
4131 /* Get the colors from the "Normal" and "Menu" group (set in syntax.c or
|
|
|
4132 * in a vimrc file) */
|
|
|
4133 set_normal_colors();
|
|
|
4134
|
|
|
4135 /* Check that none of the colors are the same as the background color */
|
|
|
4136 gui_check_colors();
|
|
|
4137
|
|
|
4138 /* Get the colors for the highlight groups (gui_check_colors() might have
|
|
|
4139 * changed them). */
|
|
|
4140 highlight_gui_started(); /* re-init colors and fonts */
|
|
|
4141
|
|
|
4142 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "destroy",
|
|
|
4143 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(mainwin_destroy_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
4144
|
|
|
4145 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN
|
|
|
4146 hangul_keyboard_set();
|
|
|
4147 #endif
|
|
|
4148
|
|
|
4149 /*
|
|
|
4150 * Notify the fixed area about the need to resize the contents of the
|
|
|
4151 * gui.formwin, which we use for random positioning of the included
|
|
|
4152 * components.
|
|
|
4153 *
|
|
|
4154 * We connect this signal deferred finally after anything is in place,
|
|
|
4155 * since this is intended to handle resizements coming from the window
|
|
|
4156 * manager upon us and should not interfere with what VIM is requesting
|
|
|
4157 * upon startup.
|
|
|
4158 */
|
|
|
4159 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.formwin), "configure_event",
|
|
|
4160 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(form_configure_event), NULL);
|
|
|
4161
|
|
|
4162 #ifdef FEAT_DND
|
|
|
4163 /*
|
|
|
4164 * Set up for receiving DND items.
|
|
|
4165 */
|
|
|
4166 gtk_drag_dest_set(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
4167 GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL,
|
|
|
4168 dnd_targets, N_DND_TARGETS,
|
|
|
4169 GDK_ACTION_COPY);
|
|
|
4170
|
|
|
4171 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "drag_data_received",
|
|
|
4172 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drag_data_received_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
4173 #endif
|
|
|
4174
|
|
|
4175 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4176 /* With GTK+ 2, we need to iconify the window before calling show()
|
|
|
4177 * to avoid mapping the window for a short time. This is just as one
|
|
|
4178 * would expect it to work, but it's different in GTK+ 1. The funny
|
|
|
4179 * thing is that iconifying after show() _does_ work with GTK+ 1.
|
|
|
4180 * (BTW doing this in the "realize" handler makes no difference.) */
|
|
|
4181 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
4182 gui_mch_iconify();
|
|
|
4183 #endif
|
|
|
4184
|
|
|
4185 {
|
|
|
4186 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU)
|
|
|
4187 unsigned long menu_handler = 0;
|
|
|
4188 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
4189 unsigned long tool_handler = 0;
|
|
|
4190 # endif
|
|
|
4191 /*
|
|
|
4192 * Urgh hackish :/ For some reason BonoboDockLayout always forces a
|
|
|
4193 * show when restoring the saved layout configuration. We can't just
|
|
|
4194 * hide the widgets again after gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin) since it's
|
|
|
4195 * a toplevel window and thus will be realized immediately. Instead,
|
|
|
4196 * connect signal handlers to hide the widgets just after they've been
|
|
|
4197 * marked visible, but before the main window is realized.
|
|
|
4198 */
|
|
|
4199 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_MENUS) == NULL)
|
|
|
4200 menu_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.menubar_h, "show",
|
|
|
4201 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide),
|
|
|
4202 NULL);
|
|
|
4203 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
4204 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) == NULL
|
|
|
4205 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)))
|
|
|
4206 tool_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.toolbar_h, "show",
|
|
|
4207 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide),
|
|
|
4208 NULL);
|
|
|
4209 # endif
|
|
|
4210 #endif
|
|
|
4211 gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
4212
|
|
|
4213 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU)
|
|
|
4214 if (menu_handler != 0)
|
|
|
4215 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.menubar_h, menu_handler);
|
|
|
4216 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
4217 if (tool_handler != 0)
|
|
|
4218 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.toolbar_h, tool_handler);
|
|
|
4219 # endif
|
|
|
4220 #endif
|
|
|
4221 }
|
|
|
4222
|
|
|
4223 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4224 /* With GTK+ 1, we need to iconify the window after calling show().
|
|
|
4225 * See the comment above for details. */
|
|
|
4226 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
4227 gui_mch_iconify();
|
|
|
4228 #endif
|
|
|
4229
|
|
|
4230 return OK;
|
|
|
4231 }
|
|
|
4232
|
|
|
4233
|
|
|
4234 void
|
|
1884
|
4235 gui_mch_exit(int rc UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
4236 {
|
|
|
4237 if (gui.mainwin != NULL)
|
|
|
4238 gtk_widget_destroy(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
4239
|
|
|
4240 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
4241 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
4242 }
|
|
|
4243
|
|
|
4244 /*
|
|
|
4245 * Get the position of the top left corner of the window.
|
|
|
4246 */
|
|
|
4247 int
|
|
|
4248 gui_mch_get_winpos(int *x, int *y)
|
|
|
4249 {
|
|
|
4250 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4251 gtk_window_get_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y);
|
|
|
4252 #else
|
|
|
4253 /* For some people this must be gdk_window_get_origin() for a correct
|
|
|
4254 * result. Where is the documentation! */
|
|
|
4255 gdk_window_get_root_origin(gui.mainwin->window, x, y);
|
|
|
4256 #endif
|
|
|
4257 return OK;
|
|
|
4258 }
|
|
|
4259
|
|
|
4260 /*
|
|
|
4261 * Set the position of the top left corner of the window to the given
|
|
|
4262 * coordinates.
|
|
|
4263 */
|
|
|
4264 void
|
|
|
4265 gui_mch_set_winpos(int x, int y)
|
|
|
4266 {
|
|
|
4267 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4268 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y);
|
|
|
4269 #else
|
|
|
4270 gdk_window_move(gui.mainwin->window, x, y);
|
|
|
4271 #endif
|
|
|
4272 }
|
|
|
4273
|
|
|
4274 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4275 #if 0
|
|
|
4276 static int resize_idle_installed = FALSE;
|
|
|
4277 /*
|
|
|
4278 * Idle handler to force resize. Used by gui_mch_set_shellsize() to ensure
|
|
|
4279 * the shell size doesn't exceed the window size, i.e. if the window manager
|
|
|
4280 * ignored our size request. Usually this happens if the window is maximized.
|
|
|
4281 *
|
|
|
4282 * FIXME: It'd be nice if we could find a little more orthodox solution.
|
|
|
4283 * See also the remark below in gui_mch_set_shellsize().
|
|
|
4284 *
|
|
|
4285 * DISABLED: When doing ":set lines+=1" this function would first invoke
|
|
|
4286 * gui_resize_shell() with the old size, then the normal callback would
|
|
|
4287 * report the new size through form_configure_event(). That caused the window
|
|
|
4288 * layout to be messed up.
|
|
|
4289 */
|
|
|
4290 static gboolean
|
|
|
4291 force_shell_resize_idle(gpointer data)
|
|
|
4292 {
|
|
|
4293 if (gui.mainwin != NULL
|
|
|
4294 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin)
|
|
|
4295 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
4296 {
|
|
|
4297 int width;
|
|
|
4298 int height;
|
|
|
4299
|
|
|
4300 gtk_window_get_size(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), &width, &height);
|
|
|
4301
|
|
|
4302 width -= get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
4303 height -= get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
4304
|
|
|
4305 gui_resize_shell(width, height);
|
|
|
4306 }
|
|
|
4307
|
|
|
4308 resize_idle_installed = FALSE;
|
|
|
4309 return FALSE; /* don't call me again */
|
|
|
4310 }
|
|
|
4311 #endif
|
|
|
4312 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4313
|
|
|
4314 /*
|
|
|
4315 * Set the windows size.
|
|
|
4316 */
|
|
|
4317 void
|
|
|
4318 gui_mch_set_shellsize(int width, int height,
|
|
1884
|
4319 int min_width UNUSED, int min_height UNUSED,
|
|
|
4320 int base_width UNUSED, int base_height UNUSED,
|
|
|
4321 int direction UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
4322 {
|
|
|
4323 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4324 /* Hack: When the form already is at the desired size, the window might
|
|
|
4325 * have been resized with the mouse. Force a resize by setting a
|
|
|
4326 * different size first. */
|
|
|
4327 if (GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)->width == width
|
|
|
4328 && GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)->height == height)
|
|
|
4329 {
|
|
|
4330 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), width + 1, height + 1);
|
|
|
4331 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
4332 }
|
|
|
4333 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), width, height);
|
|
|
4334 #endif
|
|
|
4335
|
|
|
4336 /* give GTK+ a chance to put all widget's into place */
|
|
|
4337 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
4338
|
|
791
|
4339 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
7
|
4340 /* this will cause the proper resizement to happen too */
|
|
791
|
4341 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
|
4342
|
|
|
4343 #else /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4344 /* this will cause the proper resizement to happen too */
|
|
|
4345 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
856
|
4346 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
791
|
4347
|
|
7
|
4348 /* With GTK+ 2, changing the size of the form widget doesn't resize
|
|
791
|
4349 * the window. So let's do it the other way around and resize the
|
|
7
|
4350 * main window instead. */
|
|
|
4351 width += get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
4352 height += get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
4353
|
|
791
|
4354 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
856
|
4355 gtk_window_resize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), width, height);
|
|
791
|
4356 else
|
|
856
|
4357 update_window_manager_hints(width, height);
|
|
7
|
4358
|
|
|
4359 #if 0
|
|
|
4360 if (!resize_idle_installed)
|
|
|
4361 {
|
|
|
4362 g_idle_add_full(GDK_PRIORITY_EVENTS + 10,
|
|
|
4363 &force_shell_resize_idle, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
4364 resize_idle_installed = TRUE;
|
|
|
4365 }
|
|
|
4366 #endif
|
|
|
4367 /*
|
|
|
4368 * Wait until all events are processed to prevent a crash because the
|
|
|
4369 * real size of the drawing area doesn't reflect Vim's internal ideas.
|
|
|
4370 *
|
|
|
4371 * This is a bit of a hack, since Vim is a terminal application with a GUI
|
|
|
4372 * on top, while the GUI expects to be the boss.
|
|
|
4373 */
|
|
|
4374 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
4375 #endif
|
|
|
4376 }
|
|
|
4377
|
|
|
4378
|
|
|
4379 /*
|
|
|
4380 * The screen size is used to make sure the initial window doesn't get bigger
|
|
|
4381 * than the screen. This subtracts some room for menubar, toolbar and window
|
|
|
4382 * decorations.
|
|
|
4383 */
|
|
|
4384 void
|
|
|
4385 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(int *screen_w, int *screen_h)
|
|
|
4386 {
|
|
|
4387 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
4388 GdkScreen* screen;
|
|
|
4389
|
|
|
4390 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gtk_widget_has_screen(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
4391 screen = gtk_widget_get_screen(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
4392 else
|
|
|
4393 screen = gdk_screen_get_default();
|
|
|
4394
|
|
|
4395 *screen_w = gdk_screen_get_width(screen);
|
|
|
4396 *screen_h = gdk_screen_get_height(screen) - p_ghr;
|
|
|
4397 #else
|
|
|
4398 *screen_w = gdk_screen_width();
|
|
|
4399 /* Subtract 'guiheadroom' from the height to allow some room for the
|
|
|
4400 * window manager (task list and window title bar). */
|
|
|
4401 *screen_h = gdk_screen_height() - p_ghr;
|
|
|
4402 #endif
|
|
|
4403
|
|
|
4404 /*
|
|
|
4405 * FIXME: dirty trick: Because the gui_get_base_height() doesn't include
|
|
|
4406 * the toolbar and menubar for GTK, we subtract them from the screen
|
|
|
4407 * hight, so that the window size can be made to fit on the screen.
|
|
|
4408 * This should be completely changed later.
|
|
|
4409 */
|
|
|
4410 *screen_w -= get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
4411 *screen_h -= get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
4412 }
|
|
|
4413
|
|
|
4414 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4415 void
|
|
1884
|
4416 gui_mch_settitle(char_u *title, char_u *icon UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
4417 {
|
|
|
4418 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4419 if (title != NULL && output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
4420 title = string_convert(&output_conv, title, NULL);
|
|
|
4421 # endif
|
|
|
4422
|
|
|
4423 gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), (const char *)title);
|
|
|
4424
|
|
|
4425 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4426 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
4427 vim_free(title);
|
|
|
4428 # endif
|
|
|
4429 }
|
|
|
4430 #endif /* FEAT_TITLE */
|
|
|
4431
|
|
|
4432 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4433 void
|
|
|
4434 gui_mch_enable_menu(int showit)
|
|
|
4435 {
|
|
|
4436 GtkWidget *widget;
|
|
|
4437
|
|
|
4438 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
4439 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
4440 widget = gui.menubar_h;
|
|
|
4441 else
|
|
|
4442 # endif
|
|
|
4443 widget = gui.menubar;
|
|
|
4444
|
|
827
|
4445 /* Do not disable the menu while starting up, otherwise F10 doesn't work. */
|
|
|
4446 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget) && !gui.starting)
|
|
7
|
4447 {
|
|
|
4448 if (showit)
|
|
|
4449 gtk_widget_show(widget);
|
|
|
4450 else
|
|
|
4451 gtk_widget_hide(widget);
|
|
|
4452
|
|
791
|
4453 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
7
|
4454 }
|
|
|
4455 }
|
|
|
4456 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */
|
|
|
4457
|
|
|
4458 #if defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4459 void
|
|
|
4460 gui_mch_show_toolbar(int showit)
|
|
|
4461 {
|
|
|
4462 GtkWidget *widget;
|
|
|
4463
|
|
|
4464 if (gui.toolbar == NULL)
|
|
|
4465 return;
|
|
|
4466
|
|
|
4467 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
4468 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
4469 widget = gui.toolbar_h;
|
|
|
4470 else
|
|
|
4471 # endif
|
|
|
4472 widget = gui.toolbar;
|
|
|
4473
|
|
|
4474 if (showit)
|
|
|
4475 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
4476
|
|
|
4477 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget))
|
|
|
4478 {
|
|
|
4479 if (showit)
|
|
|
4480 gtk_widget_show(widget);
|
|
|
4481 else
|
|
|
4482 gtk_widget_hide(widget);
|
|
|
4483
|
|
791
|
4484 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
7
|
4485 }
|
|
|
4486 }
|
|
|
4487 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */
|
|
|
4488
|
|
|
4489 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4490 /*
|
|
|
4491 * Get a font structure for highlighting.
|
|
|
4492 * "cbdata" is a pointer to the global gui structure.
|
|
|
4493 */
|
|
|
4494 static void
|
|
|
4495 font_sel_ok(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata)
|
|
|
4496 {
|
|
|
4497 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata;
|
|
|
4498 GtkFontSelectionDialog *fs = (GtkFontSelectionDialog *)vw->fontdlg;
|
|
|
4499
|
|
|
4500 if (vw->fontname)
|
|
|
4501 g_free(vw->fontname);
|
|
|
4502
|
|
|
4503 vw->fontname = (char_u *)gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name(fs);
|
|
|
4504 gtk_widget_hide(vw->fontdlg);
|
|
|
4505 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
4506 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
4507 }
|
|
|
4508
|
|
|
4509 static void
|
|
|
4510 font_sel_cancel(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata)
|
|
|
4511 {
|
|
|
4512 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata;
|
|
|
4513
|
|
|
4514 gtk_widget_hide(vw->fontdlg);
|
|
|
4515 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
4516 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
4517 }
|
|
|
4518
|
|
|
4519 static void
|
|
|
4520 font_sel_destroy(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata)
|
|
|
4521 {
|
|
|
4522 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata;
|
|
|
4523
|
|
|
4524 vw->fontdlg = NULL;
|
|
|
4525 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
4526 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
4527 }
|
|
|
4528 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4529
|
|
|
4530 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4531 /*
|
|
|
4532 * Check if a given font is a CJK font. This is done in a very crude manner. It
|
|
|
4533 * just see if U+04E00 for zh and ja and U+AC00 for ko are covered in a given
|
|
|
4534 * font. Consequently, this function cannot be used as a general purpose check
|
|
|
4535 * for CJK-ness for which fontconfig APIs should be used. This is only used by
|
|
|
4536 * gui_mch_init_font() to deal with 'CJK fixed width fonts'.
|
|
|
4537 */
|
|
|
4538 static int
|
|
|
4539 is_cjk_font(PangoFontDescription *font_desc)
|
|
|
4540 {
|
|
|
4541 static const char * const cjk_langs[] =
|
|
|
4542 {"zh_CN", "zh_TW", "zh_HK", "ja", "ko"};
|
|
|
4543
|
|
|
4544 PangoFont *font;
|
|
|
4545 unsigned i;
|
|
|
4546 int is_cjk = FALSE;
|
|
|
4547
|
|
|
4548 font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font_desc);
|
|
|
4549
|
|
|
4550 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
4551 return FALSE;
|
|
|
4552
|
|
|
4553 for (i = 0; !is_cjk && i < G_N_ELEMENTS(cjk_langs); ++i)
|
|
|
4554 {
|
|
|
4555 PangoCoverage *coverage;
|
|
|
4556 gunichar uc;
|
|
|
4557
|
|
|
4558 coverage = pango_font_get_coverage(
|
|
|
4559 font, pango_language_from_string(cjk_langs[i]));
|
|
|
4560
|
|
|
4561 if (coverage != NULL)
|
|
|
4562 {
|
|
|
4563 uc = (cjk_langs[i][0] == 'k') ? 0xAC00 : 0x4E00;
|
|
|
4564 is_cjk = (pango_coverage_get(coverage, uc) == PANGO_COVERAGE_EXACT);
|
|
|
4565 pango_coverage_unref(coverage);
|
|
|
4566 }
|
|
|
4567 }
|
|
|
4568
|
|
|
4569 g_object_unref(font);
|
|
|
4570
|
|
|
4571 return is_cjk;
|
|
|
4572 }
|
|
|
4573 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4574
|
|
445
|
4575 /*
|
|
|
4576 * Adjust gui.char_height (after 'linespace' was changed).
|
|
|
4577 */
|
|
7
|
4578 int
|
|
445
|
4579 gui_mch_adjust_charheight(void)
|
|
7
|
4580 {
|
|
|
4581 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4582 PangoFontMetrics *metrics;
|
|
|
4583 int ascent;
|
|
|
4584 int descent;
|
|
|
4585
|
|
|
4586 metrics = pango_context_get_metrics(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font,
|
|
|
4587 pango_context_get_language(gui.text_context));
|
|
|
4588 ascent = pango_font_metrics_get_ascent(metrics);
|
|
|
4589 descent = pango_font_metrics_get_descent(metrics);
|
|
|
4590
|
|
|
4591 pango_font_metrics_unref(metrics);
|
|
|
4592
|
|
|
4593 gui.char_height = (ascent + descent + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE
|
|
445
|
4594 + p_linespace;
|
|
136
|
4595 /* LINTED: avoid warning: bitwise operation on signed value */
|
|
7
|
4596 gui.char_ascent = PANGO_PIXELS(ascent + p_linespace * PANGO_SCALE / 2);
|
|
|
4597
|
|
|
4598 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4599
|
|
|
4600 gui.char_height = gui.current_font->ascent + gui.current_font->descent
|
|
445
|
4601 + p_linespace;
|
|
7
|
4602 gui.char_ascent = gui.current_font->ascent + p_linespace / 2;
|
|
|
4603
|
|
|
4604 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4605
|
|
|
4606 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens
|
|
|
4607 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */
|
|
|
4608 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0);
|
|
|
4609 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1);
|
|
|
4610
|
|
|
4611 return OK;
|
|
|
4612 }
|
|
|
4613
|
|
|
4614 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4615 /*
|
|
|
4616 * Try to load the requested fontset.
|
|
|
4617 */
|
|
|
4618 GuiFontset
|
|
|
4619 gui_mch_get_fontset(char_u *name, int report_error, int fixed_width)
|
|
|
4620 {
|
|
|
4621 GdkFont *font;
|
|
|
4622
|
|
|
4623 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL)
|
|
|
4624 return NOFONT;
|
|
|
4625
|
|
|
4626 font = gdk_fontset_load((gchar *)name);
|
|
|
4627
|
|
|
4628 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
4629 {
|
|
|
4630 if (report_error)
|
|
|
4631 EMSG2(_(e_fontset), name);
|
|
|
4632 return NOFONT;
|
|
|
4633 }
|
|
|
4634 /* TODO: check if the font is fixed width. */
|
|
|
4635
|
|
|
4636 /* reference this font as being in use */
|
|
|
4637 gdk_font_ref(font);
|
|
|
4638
|
|
|
4639 return (GuiFontset)font;
|
|
|
4640 }
|
|
|
4641 #endif /* FEAT_XFONTSET */
|
|
|
4642
|
|
|
4643 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4644 /*
|
|
|
4645 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory.
|
|
|
4646 * "oldval" is the previous value.
|
|
|
4647 * Return NULL when cancelled.
|
|
|
4648 */
|
|
|
4649 char_u *
|
|
|
4650 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval)
|
|
|
4651 {
|
|
|
4652 char_u *fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4653
|
|
|
4654 if (!gui.fontdlg)
|
|
|
4655 {
|
|
|
4656 GtkFontSelectionDialog *fsd = NULL;
|
|
|
4657
|
|
|
4658 gui.fontdlg = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(_("Font Selection"));
|
|
|
4659 fsd = GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg);
|
|
|
4660 gtk_window_set_modal(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), TRUE);
|
|
|
4661 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg),
|
|
|
4662 GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
4663 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.fontdlg), "destroy",
|
|
|
4664 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_destroy), &gui);
|
|
|
4665 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(fsd->ok_button), "clicked",
|
|
|
4666 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_ok), &gui);
|
|
|
4667 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(fsd->cancel_button), "clicked",
|
|
|
4668 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_cancel), &gui);
|
|
|
4669 }
|
|
|
4670
|
|
|
4671 if (oldval != NULL && *oldval != NUL)
|
|
|
4672 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name(
|
|
|
4673 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg), (char *)oldval);
|
|
|
4674
|
|
|
4675 if (gui.fontname)
|
|
|
4676 {
|
|
|
4677 g_free(gui.fontname);
|
|
|
4678 gui.fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4679 }
|
|
|
4680 gtk_window_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), GTK_WIN_POS_MOUSE);
|
|
|
4681 gtk_widget_show(gui.fontdlg);
|
|
|
4682 {
|
|
|
4683 static gchar *spacings[] = {"c", "m", NULL};
|
|
|
4684
|
|
|
4685 /* In GTK 1.2.3 this must be after the gtk_widget_show() call,
|
|
|
4686 * otherwise everything is blocked for ten seconds. */
|
|
|
4687 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_filter(
|
|
|
4688 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg),
|
|
|
4689 GTK_FONT_FILTER_BASE,
|
|
|
4690 GTK_FONT_ALL, NULL, NULL,
|
|
|
4691 NULL, NULL, spacings, NULL);
|
|
|
4692 }
|
|
|
4693
|
|
|
4694 /* Wait for the font dialog to be closed. */
|
|
|
4695 while (gui.fontdlg && GTK_WIDGET_DRAWABLE(gui.fontdlg))
|
|
|
4696 gtk_main_iteration_do(TRUE);
|
|
|
4697
|
|
|
4698 if (gui.fontname != NULL)
|
|
|
4699 {
|
|
714
|
4700 /* Apparently some font names include a comma, need to escape that,
|
|
|
4701 * because in 'guifont' it separates names. */
|
|
|
4702 fontname = vim_strsave_escaped(gui.fontname, (char_u *)",");
|
|
7
|
4703 g_free(gui.fontname);
|
|
|
4704 gui.fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4705 }
|
|
|
4706 return fontname;
|
|
|
4707 }
|
|
|
4708 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4709
|
|
|
4710 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4711 /*
|
|
|
4712 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory.
|
|
|
4713 * "oldval" is the previous value. Return NULL when cancelled.
|
|
|
4714 * This should probably go into gui_gtk.c. Hmm.
|
|
|
4715 * FIXME:
|
|
|
4716 * The GTK2 font selection dialog has no filtering API. So we could either
|
|
|
4717 * a) implement our own (possibly copying the code from somewhere else) or
|
|
|
4718 * b) just live with it.
|
|
|
4719 */
|
|
|
4720 char_u *
|
|
|
4721 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval)
|
|
|
4722 {
|
|
|
4723 GtkWidget *dialog;
|
|
|
4724 int response;
|
|
|
4725 char_u *fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4726 char_u *oldname;
|
|
|
4727
|
|
|
4728 dialog = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(NULL);
|
|
|
4729
|
|
|
4730 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
4731 gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), TRUE);
|
|
|
4732
|
|
|
4733 if (oldval != NULL && oldval[0] != NUL)
|
|
|
4734 {
|
|
|
4735 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
4736 oldname = string_convert(&output_conv, oldval, NULL);
|
|
|
4737 else
|
|
|
4738 oldname = oldval;
|
|
|
4739
|
|
|
4740 /* Annoying bug in GTK (or Pango): if the font name does not include a
|
|
|
4741 * size, zero is used. Use default point size ten. */
|
|
|
4742 if (!vim_isdigit(oldname[STRLEN(oldname) - 1]))
|
|
|
4743 {
|
|
|
4744 char_u *p = vim_strnsave(oldname, STRLEN(oldname) + 3);
|
|
|
4745
|
|
|
4746 if (p != NULL)
|
|
|
4747 {
|
|
|
4748 STRCPY(p + STRLEN(p), " 10");
|
|
|
4749 if (oldname != oldval)
|
|
|
4750 vim_free(oldname);
|
|
|
4751 oldname = p;
|
|
|
4752 }
|
|
|
4753 }
|
|
|
4754
|
|
|
4755 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name(
|
|
|
4756 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog), (const char *)oldname);
|
|
|
4757
|
|
|
4758 if (oldname != oldval)
|
|
100
|
4759 vim_free(oldname);
|
|
7
|
4760 }
|
|
|
4761
|
|
|
4762 response = gtk_dialog_run(GTK_DIALOG(dialog));
|
|
|
4763
|
|
|
4764 if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_OK)
|
|
|
4765 {
|
|
|
4766 char *name;
|
|
|
4767
|
|
|
4768 name = gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name(
|
|
|
4769 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog));
|
|
|
4770 if (name != NULL)
|
|
|
4771 {
|
|
714
|
4772 char_u *p;
|
|
|
4773
|
|
|
4774 /* Apparently some font names include a comma, need to escape
|
|
|
4775 * that, because in 'guifont' it separates names. */
|
|
|
4776 p = vim_strsave_escaped((char_u *)name, (char_u *)",");
|
|
|
4777 g_free(name);
|
|
840
|
4778 if (p != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
714
|
4779 {
|
|
|
4780 fontname = string_convert(&input_conv, p, NULL);
|
|
|
4781 vim_free(p);
|
|
|
4782 }
|
|
7
|
4783 else
|
|
714
|
4784 fontname = p;
|
|
7
|
4785 }
|
|
|
4786 }
|
|
|
4787
|
|
|
4788 if (response != GTK_RESPONSE_NONE)
|
|
|
4789 gtk_widget_destroy(dialog);
|
|
|
4790
|
|
|
4791 return fontname;
|
|
|
4792 }
|
|
|
4793
|
|
|
4794 /*
|
|
|
4795 * Some monospace fonts don't support a bold weight, and fall back
|
|
|
4796 * silently to the regular weight. But this is no good since our text
|
|
|
4797 * drawing function can emulate bold by overstriking. So let's try
|
|
|
4798 * to detect whether bold weight is actually available and emulate it
|
|
|
4799 * otherwise.
|
|
|
4800 *
|
|
|
4801 * Note that we don't need to check for italic style since Xft can
|
|
|
4802 * emulate italic on its own, provided you have a proper fontconfig
|
|
|
4803 * setup. We wouldn't be able to emulate it in Vim anyway.
|
|
|
4804 */
|
|
|
4805 static void
|
|
|
4806 get_styled_font_variants(void)
|
|
|
4807 {
|
|
|
4808 PangoFontDescription *bold_font_desc;
|
|
|
4809 PangoFont *plain_font;
|
|
|
4810 PangoFont *bold_font;
|
|
|
4811
|
|
|
4812 gui.font_can_bold = FALSE;
|
|
|
4813
|
|
|
4814 plain_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
4815
|
|
|
4816 if (plain_font == NULL)
|
|
|
4817 return;
|
|
|
4818
|
|
|
4819 bold_font_desc = pango_font_description_copy_static(gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
4820 pango_font_description_set_weight(bold_font_desc, PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD);
|
|
|
4821
|
|
|
4822 bold_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, bold_font_desc);
|
|
|
4823 /*
|
|
|
4824 * The comparison relies on the unique handle nature of a PangoFont*,
|
|
|
4825 * i.e. it's assumed that a different PangoFont* won't refer to the
|
|
|
4826 * same font. Seems to work, and failing here isn't critical anyway.
|
|
|
4827 */
|
|
|
4828 if (bold_font != NULL)
|
|
|
4829 {
|
|
|
4830 gui.font_can_bold = (bold_font != plain_font);
|
|
|
4831 g_object_unref(bold_font);
|
|
|
4832 }
|
|
|
4833
|
|
|
4834 pango_font_description_free(bold_font_desc);
|
|
|
4835 g_object_unref(plain_font);
|
|
|
4836 }
|
|
|
4837
|
|
|
4838 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4839
|
|
|
4840 /*
|
|
|
4841 * There is only one excuse I can give for the following attempt to manage font
|
|
|
4842 * styles:
|
|
|
4843 *
|
|
|
4844 * I HATE THE BRAIN DEAD WAY X11 IS HANDLING FONTS (--mdcki)
|
|
|
4845 * (Me too. --danielk)
|
|
|
4846 */
|
|
|
4847 static void
|
|
|
4848 get_styled_font_variants(char_u * font_name)
|
|
|
4849 {
|
|
|
4850 char *chunk[32];
|
|
|
4851 char *sdup;
|
|
|
4852 char *tmp;
|
|
|
4853 int len, i;
|
|
|
4854 GuiFont *styled_font[3];
|
|
|
4855
|
|
|
4856 styled_font[0] = &gui.bold_font;
|
|
|
4857 styled_font[1] = &gui.ital_font;
|
|
|
4858 styled_font[2] = &gui.boldital_font;
|
|
|
4859
|
|
1884
|
4860 /* First free whatever was previously there. */
|
|
7
|
4861 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i)
|
|
|
4862 if (*styled_font[i])
|
|
|
4863 {
|
|
|
4864 gdk_font_unref(*styled_font[i]);
|
|
|
4865 *styled_font[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
4866 }
|
|
|
4867
|
|
|
4868 if ((sdup = g_strdup((const char *)font_name)) == NULL)
|
|
|
4869 return;
|
|
|
4870
|
|
|
4871 /* split up the whole */
|
|
|
4872 i = 0;
|
|
|
4873 for (tmp = sdup; *tmp != '\0'; ++tmp)
|
|
|
4874 {
|
|
|
4875 if (*tmp == '-')
|
|
|
4876 {
|
|
|
4877 *tmp = '\0';
|
|
|
4878
|
|
|
4879 if (i == 32)
|
|
|
4880 break;
|
|
|
4881
|
|
|
4882 chunk[i] = tmp + 1;
|
|
|
4883 ++i;
|
|
|
4884 }
|
|
|
4885 }
|
|
|
4886
|
|
|
4887 if (i == 14)
|
|
|
4888 {
|
|
|
4889 GdkFont *font = NULL;
|
|
|
4890 const char *bold_chunk[3] = { "bold", NULL, "bold" };
|
|
|
4891 const char *italic_chunk[3] = { NULL, "o", "o" };
|
|
|
4892
|
|
|
4893 /* font name was complete */
|
|
|
4894 len = strlen((const char *)font_name) + 32;
|
|
|
4895
|
|
|
4896 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i)
|
|
|
4897 {
|
|
|
4898 char *styled_name;
|
|
|
4899 int j;
|
|
|
4900
|
|
|
4901 styled_name = (char *)alloc(len);
|
|
|
4902 if (styled_name == NULL)
|
|
|
4903 {
|
|
|
4904 g_free(sdup);
|
|
|
4905 return;
|
|
|
4906 }
|
|
|
4907
|
|
|
4908 *styled_name = '\0';
|
|
|
4909
|
|
|
4910 for (j = 0; j < 14; ++j)
|
|
|
4911 {
|
|
|
4912 strcat(styled_name, "-");
|
|
|
4913 if (j == 2 && bold_chunk[i] != NULL)
|
|
|
4914 strcat(styled_name, bold_chunk[i]);
|
|
|
4915 else if (j == 3 && italic_chunk[i] != NULL)
|
|
|
4916 strcat(styled_name, italic_chunk[i]);
|
|
|
4917 else
|
|
|
4918 strcat(styled_name, chunk[j]);
|
|
|
4919 }
|
|
|
4920
|
|
|
4921 font = gui_mch_get_font((char_u *)styled_name, FALSE);
|
|
|
4922 if (font != NULL)
|
|
|
4923 *styled_font[i] = font;
|
|
|
4924
|
|
|
4925 vim_free(styled_name);
|
|
|
4926 }
|
|
|
4927 }
|
|
|
4928
|
|
|
4929 g_free(sdup);
|
|
|
4930 }
|
|
|
4931 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4932
|
|
|
4933 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4934 static PangoEngineShape *default_shape_engine = NULL;
|
|
|
4935
|
|
|
4936 /*
|
|
|
4937 * Create a map from ASCII characters in the range [32,126] to glyphs
|
|
|
4938 * of the current font. This is used by gui_gtk2_draw_string() to skip
|
|
|
4939 * the itemize and shaping process for the most common case.
|
|
|
4940 */
|
|
|
4941 static void
|
|
|
4942 ascii_glyph_table_init(void)
|
|
|
4943 {
|
|
|
4944 char_u ascii_chars[128];
|
|
|
4945 PangoAttrList *attr_list;
|
|
|
4946 GList *item_list;
|
|
|
4947 int i;
|
|
|
4948
|
|
|
4949 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL)
|
|
|
4950 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs);
|
|
|
4951 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL)
|
|
|
4952 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font);
|
|
|
4953
|
|
|
4954 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL;
|
|
|
4955 gui.ascii_font = NULL;
|
|
|
4956
|
|
|
4957 /* For safety, fill in question marks for the control characters. */
|
|
|
4958 for (i = 0; i < 32; ++i)
|
|
|
4959 ascii_chars[i] = '?';
|
|
|
4960 for (; i < 127; ++i)
|
|
|
4961 ascii_chars[i] = i;
|
|
|
4962 ascii_chars[i] = '?';
|
|
|
4963
|
|
|
4964 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new();
|
|
|
4965 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context, (const char *)ascii_chars,
|
|
|
4966 0, sizeof(ascii_chars), attr_list, NULL);
|
|
|
4967
|
|
|
4968 if (item_list != NULL && item_list->next == NULL) /* play safe */
|
|
|
4969 {
|
|
|
4970 PangoItem *item;
|
|
|
4971 int width;
|
|
|
4972
|
|
|
4973 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data;
|
|
|
4974 width = gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
4975
|
|
|
4976 /* Remember the shape engine used for ASCII. */
|
|
|
4977 default_shape_engine = item->analysis.shape_engine;
|
|
|
4978
|
|
|
4979 gui.ascii_font = item->analysis.font;
|
|
|
4980 g_object_ref(gui.ascii_font);
|
|
|
4981
|
|
|
4982 gui.ascii_glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new();
|
|
|
4983
|
|
|
4984 pango_shape((const char *)ascii_chars, sizeof(ascii_chars),
|
|
|
4985 &item->analysis, gui.ascii_glyphs);
|
|
|
4986
|
|
|
4987 g_return_if_fail(gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs == sizeof(ascii_chars));
|
|
|
4988
|
|
|
4989 for (i = 0; i < gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i)
|
|
|
4990 {
|
|
|
4991 PangoGlyphGeometry *geom;
|
|
|
4992
|
|
|
4993 geom = &gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry;
|
|
|
4994 geom->x_offset += MAX(0, width - geom->width) / 2;
|
|
|
4995 geom->width = width;
|
|
|
4996 }
|
|
|
4997 }
|
|
|
4998
|
|
|
4999 g_list_foreach(item_list, (GFunc)&pango_item_free, NULL);
|
|
|
5000 g_list_free(item_list);
|
|
|
5001 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list);
|
|
|
5002 }
|
|
|
5003 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5004
|
|
|
5005 /*
|
|
|
5006 * Initialize Vim to use the font or fontset with the given name.
|
|
|
5007 * Return FAIL if the font could not be loaded, OK otherwise.
|
|
|
5008 */
|
|
|
5009 int
|
|
1884
|
5010 gui_mch_init_font(char_u *font_name, int fontset UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
5011 {
|
|
|
5012 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5013 PangoFontDescription *font_desc;
|
|
|
5014 PangoLayout *layout;
|
|
|
5015 int width;
|
|
|
5016
|
|
|
5017 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should
|
|
|
5018 * be present on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations. */
|
|
|
5019 if (font_name == NULL)
|
|
|
5020 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT;
|
|
|
5021
|
|
|
5022 font_desc = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE);
|
|
|
5023
|
|
|
5024 if (font_desc == NULL)
|
|
|
5025 return FAIL;
|
|
|
5026
|
|
|
5027 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
5028 gui.norm_font = font_desc;
|
|
|
5029
|
|
|
5030 pango_context_set_font_description(gui.text_context, font_desc);
|
|
|
5031
|
|
|
5032 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
5033 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "MW", 2);
|
|
|
5034 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL);
|
|
|
5035 /*
|
|
|
5036 * Set char_width to half the width obtained from pango_layout_get_size()
|
|
|
5037 * for CJK fixed_width/bi-width fonts. An unpatched version of Xft leads
|
|
|
5038 * Pango to use the same width for both non-CJK characters (e.g. Latin
|
|
|
5039 * letters and numbers) and CJK characters. This results in 's p a c e d
|
|
|
5040 * o u t' rendering when a CJK 'fixed width' font is used. To work around
|
|
|
5041 * that, divide the width returned by Pango by 2 if cjk_width is equal to
|
|
|
5042 * width for CJK fonts.
|
|
|
5043 *
|
|
|
5044 * For related bugs, see:
|
|
|
5045 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106618
|
|
|
5046 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106624
|
|
|
5047 *
|
|
|
5048 * With this, for all four of the following cases, Vim works fine:
|
|
|
5049 * guifont=CJK_fixed_width_font
|
|
|
5050 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font
|
|
|
5051 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font,CJK_Fixed_font
|
|
|
5052 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font guifontwide=CJK_fixed_font
|
|
|
5053 */
|
|
|
5054 if (is_cjk_font(gui.norm_font))
|
|
|
5055 {
|
|
|
5056 int cjk_width;
|
|
|
5057
|
|
|
5058 /* Measure the text extent of U+4E00 and U+4E8C */
|
|
|
5059 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "\344\270\200\344\272\214", -1);
|
|
|
5060 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &cjk_width, NULL);
|
|
|
5061
|
|
|
5062 if (width == cjk_width) /* Xft not patched */
|
|
|
5063 width /= 2;
|
|
|
5064 }
|
|
|
5065 g_object_unref(layout);
|
|
|
5066
|
|
|
5067 gui.char_width = (width / 2 + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5068
|
|
|
5069 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */
|
|
|
5070 if (gui.char_width <= 0)
|
|
|
5071 gui.char_width = 8;
|
|
|
5072
|
|
445
|
5073 gui_mch_adjust_charheight();
|
|
7
|
5074
|
|
|
5075 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */
|
|
|
5076 hl_set_font_name(font_name);
|
|
|
5077
|
|
|
5078 get_styled_font_variants();
|
|
|
5079 ascii_glyph_table_init();
|
|
|
5080
|
|
|
5081 /* Avoid unnecessary overhead if 'guifontwide' is equal to 'guifont'. */
|
|
|
5082 if (gui.wide_font != NULL
|
|
|
5083 && pango_font_description_equal(gui.norm_font, gui.wide_font))
|
|
|
5084 {
|
|
|
5085 pango_font_description_free(gui.wide_font);
|
|
|
5086 gui.wide_font = NULL;
|
|
|
5087 }
|
|
|
5088
|
|
|
5089 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5090
|
|
|
5091 GdkFont *font = NULL;
|
|
|
5092
|
|
|
5093 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
5094 /* Try loading a fontset. If this fails we try loading a normal font. */
|
|
|
5095 if (fontset && font_name != NULL)
|
|
|
5096 font = gui_mch_get_fontset(font_name, TRUE, TRUE);
|
|
|
5097
|
|
|
5098 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
5099 # endif
|
|
|
5100 {
|
|
|
5101 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should
|
|
|
5102 * be present on all X11 servers. */
|
|
|
5103 if (font_name == NULL)
|
|
|
5104 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT;
|
|
|
5105 font = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE);
|
|
|
5106 }
|
|
|
5107
|
|
|
5108 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
5109 return FAIL;
|
|
|
5110
|
|
|
5111 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
5112 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
5113 gui_mch_free_fontset(gui.fontset);
|
|
|
5114 if (font->type == GDK_FONT_FONTSET)
|
|
|
5115 {
|
|
|
5116 gui.norm_font = NOFONT;
|
|
|
5117 gui.fontset = (GuiFontset)font;
|
|
|
5118 /* Use two bytes, this works around the problem that the result would
|
|
|
5119 * be zero if no 8-bit font was found. */
|
|
|
5120 gui.char_width = gdk_string_width(font, "xW") / 2;
|
|
|
5121 }
|
|
|
5122 else
|
|
|
5123 # endif
|
|
|
5124 {
|
|
|
5125 gui.norm_font = font;
|
|
|
5126 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
5127 gui.fontset = NOFONTSET;
|
|
|
5128 # endif
|
|
|
5129 gui.char_width = ((XFontStruct *)
|
|
|
5130 GDK_FONT_XFONT(font))->max_bounds.width;
|
|
|
5131 }
|
|
|
5132
|
|
|
5133 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */
|
|
|
5134 if (gui.char_width <= 0)
|
|
|
5135 gui.char_width = 8;
|
|
|
5136
|
|
|
5137 gui.char_height = font->ascent + font->descent + p_linespace;
|
|
|
5138 gui.char_ascent = font->ascent + p_linespace / 2;
|
|
|
5139
|
|
|
5140 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens
|
|
|
5141 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */
|
|
|
5142 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0);
|
|
|
5143 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1);
|
|
|
5144
|
|
|
5145 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */
|
|
|
5146 hl_set_font_name(font_name);
|
|
|
5147
|
|
|
5148 if (font->type != GDK_FONT_FONTSET)
|
|
|
5149 get_styled_font_variants(font_name);
|
|
|
5150
|
|
|
5151 /* Synchronize the fonts used in user input dialogs, since otherwise
|
|
|
5152 * search/replace will be esp. annoying in case of international font
|
|
|
5153 * usage.
|
|
|
5154 */
|
|
|
5155 gui_gtk_synch_fonts();
|
|
|
5156
|
|
|
5157 # ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
5158 /* Adjust input management behaviour to the capabilities of the new
|
|
|
5159 * fontset */
|
|
|
5160 xim_decide_input_style();
|
|
|
5161 if (xim_get_status_area_height())
|
|
|
5162 {
|
|
|
5163 /* Status area is required. Just create the empty container so that
|
|
|
5164 * mainwin will allocate the extra space for status area. */
|
|
|
5165 GtkWidget *alignment = gtk_alignment_new((gfloat)0.5, (gfloat)0.5,
|
|
|
5166 (gfloat)1.0, (gfloat)1.0);
|
|
|
5167
|
|
|
5168 gtk_widget_set_usize(alignment, 20, gui.char_height + 2);
|
|
|
5169 gtk_box_pack_end(GTK_BOX(GTK_BIN(gui.mainwin)->child),
|
|
|
5170 alignment, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
5171 gtk_widget_show(alignment);
|
|
|
5172 }
|
|
|
5173 # endif
|
|
|
5174 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5175
|
|
|
5176 /* Preserve the logical dimensions of the screen. */
|
|
791
|
5177 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
7
|
5178
|
|
|
5179 return OK;
|
|
|
5180 }
|
|
|
5181
|
|
|
5182 /*
|
|
|
5183 * Get a reference to the font "name".
|
|
|
5184 * Return zero for failure.
|
|
|
5185 */
|
|
|
5186 GuiFont
|
|
|
5187 gui_mch_get_font(char_u *name, int report_error)
|
|
|
5188 {
|
|
|
5189 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5190 PangoFontDescription *font;
|
|
|
5191 #else
|
|
|
5192 GdkFont *font;
|
|
|
5193 #endif
|
|
|
5194
|
|
|
5195 /* can't do this when GUI is not running */
|
|
|
5196 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL)
|
|
|
5197 return NULL;
|
|
|
5198
|
|
|
5199 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5200 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
5201 {
|
|
|
5202 char_u *buf;
|
|
|
5203
|
|
|
5204 buf = string_convert(&output_conv, name, NULL);
|
|
|
5205 if (buf != NULL)
|
|
|
5206 {
|
|
|
5207 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)buf);
|
|
|
5208 vim_free(buf);
|
|
|
5209 }
|
|
|
5210 else
|
|
|
5211 font = NULL;
|
|
|
5212 }
|
|
|
5213 else
|
|
|
5214 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)name);
|
|
|
5215
|
|
|
5216 if (font != NULL)
|
|
|
5217 {
|
|
|
5218 PangoFont *real_font;
|
|
|
5219
|
|
|
5220 /* pango_context_load_font() bails out if no font size is set */
|
|
|
5221 if (pango_font_description_get_size(font) <= 0)
|
|
|
5222 pango_font_description_set_size(font, 10 * PANGO_SCALE);
|
|
|
5223
|
|
|
5224 real_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font);
|
|
|
5225
|
|
|
5226 if (real_font == NULL)
|
|
|
5227 {
|
|
|
5228 pango_font_description_free(font);
|
|
|
5229 font = NULL;
|
|
|
5230 }
|
|
|
5231 else
|
|
|
5232 g_object_unref(real_font);
|
|
|
5233 }
|
|
|
5234 #else
|
|
|
5235 font = gdk_font_load((const gchar *)name);
|
|
|
5236 #endif
|
|
|
5237
|
|
|
5238 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
5239 {
|
|
|
5240 if (report_error)
|
|
1666
|
5241 EMSG2(_((char *)e_font), name);
|
|
7
|
5242 return NULL;
|
|
|
5243 }
|
|
|
5244
|
|
|
5245 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5246 /*
|
|
|
5247 * The fixed-width check has been disabled for GTK+ 2. Rationale:
|
|
|
5248 *
|
|
|
5249 * - The check tends to report false positives, particularly
|
|
|
5250 * in non-Latin locales or with old X fonts.
|
|
|
5251 * - Thanks to our fixed-width hack in gui_gtk2_draw_string(),
|
|
|
5252 * GTK+ 2 Vim is actually capable of displaying variable width
|
|
|
5253 * fonts. Those will just be spaced out like in AA xterm.
|
|
|
5254 * - Failing here for the default font causes GUI startup to fail
|
|
|
5255 * even with wiped out configuration files.
|
|
|
5256 * - The font dialog displays all fonts unfiltered, and it's rather
|
|
|
5257 * annoying if 95% of the listed fonts produce an error message.
|
|
|
5258 */
|
|
|
5259 # if 0
|
|
|
5260 {
|
|
|
5261 /* Check that this is a mono-spaced font. Naturally, this is a bit
|
|
|
5262 * hackish -- fixed-width isn't really suitable for i18n text :/ */
|
|
|
5263 PangoLayout *layout;
|
|
|
5264 unsigned int i;
|
|
|
5265 int last_width = -1;
|
|
|
5266 const char test_chars[] = { 'W', 'i', ',', 'x' }; /* arbitrary */
|
|
|
5267
|
|
|
5268 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
5269 pango_layout_set_font_description(layout, font);
|
|
|
5270
|
|
|
5271 for (i = 0; i < G_N_ELEMENTS(test_chars); ++i)
|
|
|
5272 {
|
|
|
5273 int width;
|
|
|
5274
|
|
|
5275 pango_layout_set_text(layout, &test_chars[i], 1);
|
|
|
5276 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL);
|
|
|
5277
|
|
|
5278 if (last_width >= 0 && width != last_width)
|
|
|
5279 {
|
|
|
5280 pango_font_description_free(font);
|
|
|
5281 font = NULL;
|
|
|
5282 break;
|
|
|
5283 }
|
|
|
5284
|
|
|
5285 last_width = width;
|
|
|
5286 }
|
|
|
5287
|
|
|
5288 g_object_unref(layout);
|
|
|
5289 }
|
|
|
5290 # endif
|
|
|
5291 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5292 {
|
|
|
5293 XFontStruct *xfont;
|
|
|
5294
|
|
|
5295 /* reference this font as being in use */
|
|
|
5296 gdk_font_ref(font);
|
|
|
5297
|
|
|
5298 /* Check that this is a mono-spaced font.
|
|
|
5299 */
|
|
|
5300 xfont = (XFontStruct *) GDK_FONT_XFONT(font);
|
|
|
5301
|
|
|
5302 if (xfont->max_bounds.width != xfont->min_bounds.width)
|
|
|
5303 {
|
|
|
5304 gdk_font_unref(font);
|
|
|
5305 font = NULL;
|
|
|
5306 }
|
|
|
5307 }
|
|
|
5308 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5309
|
|
|
5310 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || 0 /* disabled for GTK+ 2, see above */
|
|
|
5311 if (font == NULL && report_error)
|
|
|
5312 EMSG2(_(e_fontwidth), name);
|
|
|
5313 #endif
|
|
|
5314
|
|
|
5315 return font;
|
|
|
5316 }
|
|
|
5317
|
|
39
|
5318 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
38
|
5319 /*
|
|
|
5320 * Return the name of font "font" in allocated memory.
|
|
|
5321 */
|
|
|
5322 char_u *
|
|
1884
|
5323 gui_mch_get_fontname(GuiFont font, char_u *name UNUSED)
|
|
38
|
5324 {
|
|
39
|
5325 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
38
|
5326 if (font != NOFONT)
|
|
|
5327 {
|
|
944
|
5328 char *pangoname = pango_font_description_to_string(font);
|
|
|
5329
|
|
|
5330 if (pangoname != NULL)
|
|
38
|
5331 {
|
|
944
|
5332 char_u *s = vim_strsave((char_u *)pangoname);
|
|
|
5333
|
|
|
5334 g_free(pangoname);
|
|
38
|
5335 return s;
|
|
|
5336 }
|
|
|
5337 }
|
|
39
|
5338 # else
|
|
38
|
5339 /* Don't know how to get the name, return what we got. */
|
|
|
5340 if (name != NULL)
|
|
|
5341 return vim_strsave(name);
|
|
39
|
5342 # endif
|
|
38
|
5343 return NULL;
|
|
|
5344 }
|
|
39
|
5345 #endif
|
|
38
|
5346
|
|
7
|
5347 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5348 /*
|
|
|
5349 * Set the current text font.
|
|
|
5350 * Since we create all GC on demand, we use just gui.current_font to
|
|
|
5351 * indicate the desired current font.
|
|
|
5352 */
|
|
|
5353 void
|
|
|
5354 gui_mch_set_font(GuiFont font)
|
|
|
5355 {
|
|
|
5356 gui.current_font = font;
|
|
|
5357 }
|
|
|
5358 #endif
|
|
|
5359
|
|
|
5360 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5361 /*
|
|
|
5362 * Set the current text fontset.
|
|
|
5363 */
|
|
|
5364 void
|
|
|
5365 gui_mch_set_fontset(GuiFontset fontset)
|
|
|
5366 {
|
|
|
5367 gui.current_font = fontset;
|
|
|
5368 }
|
|
|
5369 #endif
|
|
|
5370
|
|
|
5371 /*
|
|
|
5372 * If a font is not going to be used, free its structure.
|
|
|
5373 */
|
|
|
5374 void
|
|
|
5375 gui_mch_free_font(GuiFont font)
|
|
|
5376 {
|
|
|
5377 if (font != NOFONT)
|
|
|
5378 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5379 pango_font_description_free(font);
|
|
|
5380 #else
|
|
|
5381 gdk_font_unref(font);
|
|
|
5382 #endif
|
|
|
5383 }
|
|
|
5384
|
|
|
5385 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5386 /*
|
|
|
5387 * If a fontset is not going to be used, free its structure.
|
|
|
5388 */
|
|
|
5389 void
|
|
|
5390 gui_mch_free_fontset(GuiFontset fontset)
|
|
|
5391 {
|
|
|
5392 if (fontset != NOFONTSET)
|
|
|
5393 gdk_font_unref(fontset);
|
|
|
5394 }
|
|
|
5395 #endif
|
|
|
5396
|
|
|
5397
|
|
|
5398 /*
|
|
|
5399 * Return the Pixel value (color) for the given color name. This routine was
|
|
|
5400 * pretty much taken from example code in the Silicon Graphics OSF/Motif
|
|
|
5401 * Programmer's Guide.
|
|
|
5402 * Return INVALCOLOR for error.
|
|
|
5403 */
|
|
|
5404 guicolor_T
|
|
|
5405 gui_mch_get_color(char_u *name)
|
|
|
5406 {
|
|
|
5407 /* A number of colors that some X11 systems don't have */
|
|
|
5408 static const char *const vimnames[][2] =
|
|
|
5409 {
|
|
834
|
5410 {"LightRed", "#FFBBBB"},
|
|
|
5411 {"LightGreen", "#88FF88"},
|
|
|
5412 {"LightMagenta","#FFBBFF"},
|
|
|
5413 {"DarkCyan", "#008888"},
|
|
|
5414 {"DarkBlue", "#0000BB"},
|
|
|
5415 {"DarkRed", "#BB0000"},
|
|
|
5416 {"DarkMagenta", "#BB00BB"},
|
|
|
5417 {"DarkGrey", "#BBBBBB"},
|
|
|
5418 {"DarkYellow", "#BBBB00"},
|
|
|
5419 {"Gray10", "#1A1A1A"},
|
|
|
5420 {"Grey10", "#1A1A1A"},
|
|
|
5421 {"Gray20", "#333333"},
|
|
|
5422 {"Grey20", "#333333"},
|
|
|
5423 {"Gray30", "#4D4D4D"},
|
|
|
5424 {"Grey30", "#4D4D4D"},
|
|
|
5425 {"Gray40", "#666666"},
|
|
|
5426 {"Grey40", "#666666"},
|
|
|
5427 {"Gray50", "#7F7F7F"},
|
|
|
5428 {"Grey50", "#7F7F7F"},
|
|
|
5429 {"Gray60", "#999999"},
|
|
|
5430 {"Grey60", "#999999"},
|
|
|
5431 {"Gray70", "#B3B3B3"},
|
|
|
5432 {"Grey70", "#B3B3B3"},
|
|
|
5433 {"Gray80", "#CCCCCC"},
|
|
|
5434 {"Grey80", "#CCCCCC"},
|
|
|
5435 {"Gray90", "#E5E5E5"},
|
|
|
5436 {"Grey90", "#E5E5E5"},
|
|
7
|
5437 {NULL, NULL}
|
|
|
5438 };
|
|
|
5439
|
|
|
5440 if (!gui.in_use) /* can't do this when GUI not running */
|
|
|
5441 return INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
5442
|
|
|
5443 while (name != NULL)
|
|
|
5444 {
|
|
|
5445 GdkColor color;
|
|
|
5446 int parsed;
|
|
|
5447 int i;
|
|
|
5448
|
|
|
5449 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const char *)name, &color);
|
|
|
5450
|
|
|
5451 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* ohh, lovely GTK+ 2, eases our pain :) */
|
|
|
5452 /*
|
|
|
5453 * Since we have already called gtk_set_locale here the bugger
|
|
|
5454 * XParseColor will accept only explicit color names in the language
|
|
1226
|
5455 * of the current locale. However this will interfere with:
|
|
7
|
5456 * 1. Vim's global startup files
|
|
|
5457 * 2. Explicit color names in .vimrc
|
|
|
5458 *
|
|
|
5459 * Therefore we first try to parse the color in the current locale and
|
|
|
5460 * if it fails, we fall back to the portable "C" one.
|
|
|
5461 */
|
|
|
5462 if (!parsed)
|
|
|
5463 {
|
|
|
5464 char *current;
|
|
|
5465
|
|
|
5466 current = setlocale(LC_ALL, NULL);
|
|
|
5467 if (current != NULL)
|
|
|
5468 {
|
|
|
5469 char *saved;
|
|
|
5470
|
|
|
5471 saved = g_strdup(current);
|
|
|
5472 setlocale(LC_ALL, "C");
|
|
|
5473
|
|
|
5474 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const gchar *)name, &color);
|
|
|
5475
|
|
|
5476 setlocale(LC_ALL, saved);
|
|
|
5477 gtk_set_locale();
|
|
|
5478
|
|
|
5479 g_free(saved);
|
|
|
5480 }
|
|
|
5481 }
|
|
|
5482 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5483
|
|
|
5484 if (parsed)
|
|
|
5485 {
|
|
|
5486 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5487 gdk_colormap_alloc_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
5488 &color, FALSE, TRUE);
|
|
|
5489 #else
|
|
|
5490 gdk_color_alloc(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), &color);
|
|
|
5491 #endif
|
|
|
5492 return (guicolor_T)color.pixel;
|
|
|
5493 }
|
|
|
5494 /* add a few builtin names and try again */
|
|
|
5495 for (i = 0; ; ++i)
|
|
|
5496 {
|
|
|
5497 if (vimnames[i][0] == NULL)
|
|
|
5498 {
|
|
|
5499 name = NULL;
|
|
|
5500 break;
|
|
|
5501 }
|
|
|
5502 if (STRICMP(name, vimnames[i][0]) == 0)
|
|
|
5503 {
|
|
|
5504 name = (char_u *)vimnames[i][1];
|
|
|
5505 break;
|
|
|
5506 }
|
|
|
5507 }
|
|
|
5508 }
|
|
|
5509
|
|
|
5510 return INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
5511 }
|
|
|
5512
|
|
|
5513 /*
|
|
|
5514 * Set the current text foreground color.
|
|
|
5515 */
|
|
|
5516 void
|
|
|
5517 gui_mch_set_fg_color(guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
5518 {
|
|
|
5519 gui.fgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color;
|
|
|
5520 }
|
|
|
5521
|
|
|
5522 /*
|
|
|
5523 * Set the current text background color.
|
|
|
5524 */
|
|
|
5525 void
|
|
|
5526 gui_mch_set_bg_color(guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
5527 {
|
|
|
5528 gui.bgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color;
|
|
|
5529 }
|
|
|
5530
|
|
207
|
5531 /*
|
|
|
5532 * Set the current text special color.
|
|
|
5533 */
|
|
|
5534 void
|
|
|
5535 gui_mch_set_sp_color(guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
5536 {
|
|
|
5537 gui.spcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color;
|
|
|
5538 }
|
|
|
5539
|
|
7
|
5540 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5541 /*
|
|
|
5542 * Function-like convenience macro for the sake of efficiency.
|
|
|
5543 */
|
|
|
5544 #define INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(Attribute, AttrList, Start, End) \
|
|
|
5545 G_STMT_START{ \
|
|
|
5546 PangoAttribute *tmp_attr_; \
|
|
|
5547 tmp_attr_ = (Attribute); \
|
|
|
5548 tmp_attr_->start_index = (Start); \
|
|
|
5549 tmp_attr_->end_index = (End); \
|
|
|
5550 pango_attr_list_insert((AttrList), tmp_attr_); \
|
|
|
5551 }G_STMT_END
|
|
|
5552
|
|
|
5553 static void
|
|
|
5554 apply_wide_font_attr(char_u *s, int len, PangoAttrList *attr_list)
|
|
|
5555 {
|
|
|
5556 char_u *start = NULL;
|
|
|
5557 char_u *p;
|
|
|
5558 int uc;
|
|
|
5559
|
|
|
5560 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += utf_byte2len(*p))
|
|
|
5561 {
|
|
|
5562 uc = utf_ptr2char(p);
|
|
|
5563
|
|
|
5564 if (start == NULL)
|
|
|
5565 {
|
|
|
5566 if (uc >= 0x80 && utf_char2cells(uc) == 2)
|
|
|
5567 start = p;
|
|
|
5568 }
|
|
|
5569 else if (uc < 0x80 /* optimization shortcut */
|
|
|
5570 || (utf_char2cells(uc) != 2 && !utf_iscomposing(uc)))
|
|
|
5571 {
|
|
|
5572 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font),
|
|
|
5573 attr_list, start - s, p - s);
|
|
|
5574 start = NULL;
|
|
|
5575 }
|
|
|
5576 }
|
|
|
5577
|
|
|
5578 if (start != NULL)
|
|
|
5579 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font),
|
|
|
5580 attr_list, start - s, len);
|
|
|
5581 }
|
|
|
5582
|
|
|
5583 static int
|
|
|
5584 count_cluster_cells(char_u *s, PangoItem *item,
|
|
|
5585 PangoGlyphString* glyphs, int i,
|
|
|
5586 int *cluster_width,
|
|
|
5587 int *last_glyph_rbearing)
|
|
|
5588 {
|
|
|
5589 char_u *p;
|
|
|
5590 int next; /* glyph start index of next cluster */
|
|
|
5591 int start, end; /* string segment of current cluster */
|
|
|
5592 int width; /* real cluster width in Pango units */
|
|
|
5593 int uc;
|
|
|
5594 int cellcount = 0;
|
|
|
5595
|
|
|
5596 width = glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry.width;
|
|
|
5597
|
|
|
5598 for (next = i + 1; next < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++next)
|
|
|
5599 {
|
|
|
5600 if (glyphs->glyphs[next].attr.is_cluster_start)
|
|
|
5601 break;
|
|
|
5602 else if (glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width > width)
|
|
|
5603 width = glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width;
|
|
|
5604 }
|
|
|
5605
|
|
|
5606 start = item->offset + glyphs->log_clusters[i];
|
|
|
5607 end = item->offset + ((next < glyphs->num_glyphs) ?
|
|
|
5608 glyphs->log_clusters[next] : item->length);
|
|
|
5609
|
|
|
5610 for (p = s + start; p < s + end; p += utf_byte2len(*p))
|
|
|
5611 {
|
|
|
5612 uc = utf_ptr2char(p);
|
|
|
5613 if (uc < 0x80)
|
|
|
5614 ++cellcount;
|
|
|
5615 else if (!utf_iscomposing(uc))
|
|
|
5616 cellcount += utf_char2cells(uc);
|
|
|
5617 }
|
|
|
5618
|
|
|
5619 if (last_glyph_rbearing != NULL
|
|
|
5620 && cellcount > 0 && next == glyphs->num_glyphs)
|
|
|
5621 {
|
|
|
5622 PangoRectangle ink_rect;
|
|
|
5623 /*
|
|
|
5624 * If a certain combining mark had to be taken from a non-monospace
|
|
|
5625 * font, we have to compensate manually by adapting x_offset according
|
|
|
5626 * to the ink extents of the previous glyph.
|
|
|
5627 */
|
|
|
5628 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font,
|
|
|
5629 glyphs->glyphs[i].glyph,
|
|
|
5630 &ink_rect, NULL);
|
|
|
5631
|
|
|
5632 if (PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect) > 0)
|
|
|
5633 *last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect);
|
|
|
5634 }
|
|
|
5635
|
|
|
5636 if (cellcount > 0)
|
|
|
5637 *cluster_width = width;
|
|
|
5638
|
|
|
5639 return cellcount;
|
|
|
5640 }
|
|
|
5641
|
|
|
5642 /*
|
|
|
5643 * If there are only combining characters in the cluster, we cannot just
|
|
|
5644 * change the width of the previous glyph since there is none. Therefore
|
|
|
5645 * some guesswork is needed.
|
|
|
5646 *
|
|
|
5647 * If ink_rect.x is negative Pango apparently has taken care of the composing
|
|
|
5648 * by itself. Actually setting x_offset = 0 should be sufficient then, but due
|
|
|
5649 * to problems with composing from different fonts we still need to fine-tune
|
|
|
5650 * x_offset to avoid uglyness.
|
|
|
5651 *
|
|
|
5652 * If ink_rect.x is not negative, force overstriking by pointing x_offset to
|
|
|
5653 * the position of the previous glyph. Apparently this happens only with old
|
|
|
5654 * X fonts which don't provide the special combining information needed by
|
|
|
5655 * Pango.
|
|
|
5656 */
|
|
|
5657 static void
|
|
|
5658 setup_zero_width_cluster(PangoItem *item, PangoGlyphInfo *glyph,
|
|
|
5659 int last_cellcount, int last_cluster_width,
|
|
|
5660 int last_glyph_rbearing)
|
|
|
5661 {
|
|
|
5662 PangoRectangle ink_rect;
|
|
|
5663 PangoRectangle logical_rect;
|
|
|
5664 int width;
|
|
|
5665
|
|
|
5666 width = last_cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5667 glyph->geometry.x_offset = -width + MAX(0, width - last_cluster_width) / 2;
|
|
|
5668 glyph->geometry.width = 0;
|
|
|
5669
|
|
|
5670 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font,
|
|
|
5671 glyph->glyph,
|
|
|
5672 &ink_rect, &logical_rect);
|
|
|
5673 if (ink_rect.x < 0)
|
|
|
5674 {
|
|
|
5675 glyph->geometry.x_offset += last_glyph_rbearing;
|
|
|
5676 glyph->geometry.y_offset = logical_rect.height
|
|
|
5677 - (gui.char_height - p_linespace) * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5678 }
|
|
|
5679 }
|
|
|
5680
|
|
|
5681 static void
|
|
|
5682 draw_glyph_string(int row, int col, int num_cells, int flags,
|
|
|
5683 PangoFont *font, PangoGlyphString *glyphs)
|
|
|
5684 {
|
|
|
5685 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP))
|
|
|
5686 {
|
|
|
5687 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
5688
|
|
|
5689 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5690 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5691 TRUE,
|
|
|
5692 FILL_X(col),
|
|
|
5693 FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
5694 num_cells * gui.char_width,
|
|
|
5695 gui.char_height);
|
|
|
5696 }
|
|
|
5697
|
|
|
5698 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
5699
|
|
|
5700 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5701 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5702 font,
|
|
|
5703 TEXT_X(col),
|
|
|
5704 TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
5705 glyphs);
|
|
|
5706
|
|
|
5707 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */
|
|
|
5708 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && !gui.font_can_bold)
|
|
|
5709 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5710 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5711 font,
|
|
|
5712 TEXT_X(col) + 1,
|
|
|
5713 TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
5714 glyphs);
|
|
|
5715 }
|
|
|
5716
|
|
|
5717 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5718
|
|
207
|
5719 /*
|
|
|
5720 * Draw underline and undercurl at the bottom of the character cell.
|
|
|
5721 */
|
|
|
5722 static void
|
|
|
5723 draw_under(int flags, int row, int col, int cells)
|
|
|
5724 {
|
|
|
5725 int i;
|
|
|
5726 int offset;
|
|
1884
|
5727 static const int val[8] = {1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 2, 2 };
|
|
207
|
5728 int y = FILL_Y(row + 1) - 1;
|
|
|
5729
|
|
|
5730 /* Undercurl: draw curl at the bottom of the character cell. */
|
|
|
5731 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERC)
|
|
|
5732 {
|
|
|
5733 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.spcolor);
|
|
|
5734 for (i = FILL_X(col); i < FILL_X(col + cells); ++i)
|
|
|
5735 {
|
|
|
5736 offset = val[i % 8];
|
|
|
5737 gdk_draw_point(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, i, y - offset);
|
|
|
5738 }
|
|
|
5739 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
5740 }
|
|
|
5741
|
|
|
5742 /* Underline: draw a line at the bottom of the character cell. */
|
|
|
5743 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERL)
|
|
|
5744 {
|
|
|
5745 /* When p_linespace is 0, overwrite the bottom row of pixels.
|
|
|
5746 * Otherwise put the line just below the character. */
|
|
|
5747 if (p_linespace > 1)
|
|
|
5748 y -= p_linespace - 1;
|
|
|
5749 gdk_draw_line(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5750 FILL_X(col), y,
|
|
|
5751 FILL_X(col + cells) - 1, y);
|
|
|
5752 }
|
|
|
5753 }
|
|
|
5754
|
|
7
|
5755 #if defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5756 int
|
|
|
5757 gui_gtk2_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags)
|
|
|
5758 {
|
|
|
5759 GdkRectangle area; /* area for clip mask */
|
|
|
5760 PangoGlyphString *glyphs; /* glyphs of current item */
|
|
|
5761 int column_offset = 0; /* column offset in cells */
|
|
|
5762 int i;
|
|
|
5763 char_u *conv_buf = NULL; /* result of UTF-8 conversion */
|
|
|
5764 char_u *new_conv_buf;
|
|
|
5765 int convlen;
|
|
|
5766 char_u *sp, *bp;
|
|
|
5767 int plen;
|
|
|
5768
|
|
|
5769 if (gui.text_context == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
5770 return len;
|
|
|
5771
|
|
|
5772 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
5773 {
|
|
|
5774 /*
|
|
|
5775 * Convert characters from 'encoding' to 'termencoding', which is set
|
|
|
5776 * to UTF-8 by gui_mch_init(). did_set_string_option() in option.c
|
|
|
5777 * prohibits changing this to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is
|
|
|
5778 * in use.
|
|
|
5779 */
|
|
|
5780 convlen = len;
|
|
|
5781 conv_buf = string_convert(&output_conv, s, &convlen);
|
|
|
5782 g_return_val_if_fail(conv_buf != NULL, len);
|
|
|
5783
|
|
|
5784 /* Correct for differences in char width: some chars are
|
|
|
5785 * double-wide in 'encoding' but single-wide in utf-8. Add a space to
|
|
|
5786 * compensate for that. */
|
|
|
5787 for (sp = s, bp = conv_buf; sp < s + len && bp < conv_buf + convlen; )
|
|
|
5788 {
|
|
474
|
5789 plen = utf_ptr2len(bp);
|
|
7
|
5790 if ((*mb_ptr2cells)(sp) == 2 && utf_ptr2cells(bp) == 1)
|
|
|
5791 {
|
|
|
5792 new_conv_buf = alloc(convlen + 2);
|
|
|
5793 if (new_conv_buf == NULL)
|
|
|
5794 return len;
|
|
|
5795 plen += bp - conv_buf;
|
|
|
5796 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf, conv_buf, plen);
|
|
|
5797 new_conv_buf[plen] = ' ';
|
|
|
5798 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf + plen + 1, conv_buf + plen,
|
|
|
5799 convlen - plen + 1);
|
|
|
5800 vim_free(conv_buf);
|
|
|
5801 conv_buf = new_conv_buf;
|
|
|
5802 ++convlen;
|
|
|
5803 bp = conv_buf + plen;
|
|
|
5804 plen = 1;
|
|
|
5805 }
|
|
474
|
5806 sp += (*mb_ptr2len)(sp);
|
|
7
|
5807 bp += plen;
|
|
|
5808 }
|
|
|
5809 s = conv_buf;
|
|
|
5810 len = convlen;
|
|
|
5811 }
|
|
|
5812
|
|
|
5813 /*
|
|
|
5814 * Restrict all drawing to the current screen line in order to prevent
|
|
|
5815 * fuzzy font lookups from messing up the screen.
|
|
|
5816 */
|
|
|
5817 area.x = gui.border_offset;
|
|
|
5818 area.y = FILL_Y(row);
|
|
|
5819 area.width = gui.num_cols * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
5820 area.height = gui.char_height;
|
|
|
5821
|
|
|
5822 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc, 0, 0);
|
|
|
5823 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, &area);
|
|
|
5824
|
|
|
5825 glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new();
|
|
|
5826
|
|
|
5827 /*
|
|
|
5828 * Optimization hack: If possible, skip the itemize and shaping process
|
|
|
5829 * for pure ASCII strings. This optimization is particularly effective
|
|
|
5830 * because Vim draws space characters to clear parts of the screen.
|
|
|
5831 */
|
|
|
5832 if (!(flags & DRAW_ITALIC)
|
|
|
5833 && !((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold)
|
|
|
5834 && gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL)
|
|
|
5835 {
|
|
|
5836 char_u *p;
|
|
|
5837
|
|
|
5838 for (p = s; p < s + len; ++p)
|
|
|
5839 if (*p & 0x80)
|
|
|
5840 goto not_ascii;
|
|
|
5841
|
|
|
5842 pango_glyph_string_set_size(glyphs, len);
|
|
|
5843
|
|
|
5844 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
|
|
|
5845 {
|
|
|
5846 glyphs->glyphs[i] = gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[s[i]];
|
|
|
5847 glyphs->log_clusters[i] = i;
|
|
|
5848 }
|
|
|
5849
|
|
|
5850 draw_glyph_string(row, col, len, flags, gui.ascii_font, glyphs);
|
|
|
5851
|
|
|
5852 column_offset = len;
|
|
|
5853 }
|
|
|
5854 else
|
|
|
5855 not_ascii:
|
|
|
5856 {
|
|
|
5857 PangoAttrList *attr_list;
|
|
|
5858 GList *item_list;
|
|
|
5859 int cluster_width;
|
|
|
5860 int last_glyph_rbearing;
|
|
|
5861 int cells = 0; /* cells occupied by current cluster */
|
|
497
|
5862 #if 0
|
|
|
5863 int monospace13 = STRICMP(p_guifont, "monospace 13") == 0;
|
|
|
5864 #endif
|
|
7
|
5865
|
|
26
|
5866 /* Safety check: pango crashes when invoked with invalid utf-8
|
|
|
5867 * characters. */
|
|
|
5868 if (!utf_valid_string(s, s + len))
|
|
|
5869 {
|
|
|
5870 column_offset = len;
|
|
|
5871 goto skipitall;
|
|
|
5872 }
|
|
|
5873
|
|
7
|
5874 /* original width of the current cluster */
|
|
|
5875 cluster_width = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
5876
|
|
|
5877 /* right bearing of the last non-composing glyph */
|
|
|
5878 last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
5879
|
|
|
5880 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new();
|
|
|
5881
|
|
|
5882 /* If 'guifontwide' is set then use that for double-width characters.
|
|
|
5883 * Otherwise just go with 'guifont' and let Pango do its thing. */
|
|
|
5884 if (gui.wide_font != NULL)
|
|
|
5885 apply_wide_font_attr(s, len, attr_list);
|
|
|
5886
|
|
|
5887 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold)
|
|
|
5888 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_weight_new(PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD),
|
|
|
5889 attr_list, 0, len);
|
|
|
5890 if (flags & DRAW_ITALIC)
|
|
|
5891 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_style_new(PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC),
|
|
|
5892 attr_list, 0, len);
|
|
|
5893 /*
|
|
|
5894 * Break the text into segments with consistent directional level
|
|
|
5895 * and shaping engine. Pure Latin text needs only a single segment,
|
|
|
5896 * so there's no need to worry about the loop's efficiency. Better
|
|
|
5897 * try to optimize elsewhere, e.g. reducing exposes and stuff :)
|
|
|
5898 */
|
|
|
5899 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context,
|
|
|
5900 (const char *)s, 0, len, attr_list, NULL);
|
|
|
5901
|
|
|
5902 while (item_list != NULL)
|
|
|
5903 {
|
|
|
5904 PangoItem *item;
|
|
|
5905 int item_cells = 0; /* item length in cells */
|
|
|
5906
|
|
|
5907 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data;
|
|
|
5908 item_list = g_list_delete_link(item_list, item_list);
|
|
|
5909 /*
|
|
|
5910 * Increment the bidirectional embedding level by 1 if it is not
|
|
|
5911 * even. An odd number means the output will be RTL, but we don't
|
|
|
5912 * want that since Vim handles right-to-left text on its own. It
|
|
|
5913 * would probably be sufficient to just set level = 0, but you can
|
|
|
5914 * never know :)
|
|
|
5915 *
|
|
|
5916 * Unfortunately we can't take advantage of Pango's ability to
|
|
|
5917 * render both LTR and RTL at the same time. In order to support
|
|
|
5918 * that, Vim's main screen engine would have to make use of Pango
|
|
|
5919 * functionality.
|
|
|
5920 */
|
|
|
5921 item->analysis.level = (item->analysis.level + 1) & (~1U);
|
|
|
5922
|
|
|
5923 /* HACK: Overrule the shape engine, we don't want shaping to be
|
|
|
5924 * done, because drawing the cursor would change the display. */
|
|
|
5925 item->analysis.shape_engine = default_shape_engine;
|
|
|
5926
|
|
|
5927 pango_shape((const char *)s + item->offset, item->length,
|
|
|
5928 &item->analysis, glyphs);
|
|
|
5929 /*
|
|
|
5930 * Fixed-width hack: iterate over the array and assign a fixed
|
|
|
5931 * width to each glyph, thus overriding the choice made by the
|
|
|
5932 * shaping engine. We use utf_char2cells() to determine the
|
|
|
5933 * number of cells needed.
|
|
|
5934 *
|
|
|
5935 * Also perform all kind of dark magic to get composing
|
|
|
5936 * characters right (and pretty too of course).
|
|
|
5937 */
|
|
|
5938 for (i = 0; i < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i)
|
|
|
5939 {
|
|
|
5940 PangoGlyphInfo *glyph;
|
|
|
5941
|
|
|
5942 glyph = &glyphs->glyphs[i];
|
|
|
5943
|
|
|
5944 if (glyph->attr.is_cluster_start)
|
|
|
5945 {
|
|
|
5946 int cellcount;
|
|
|
5947
|
|
|
5948 cellcount = count_cluster_cells(
|
|
|
5949 s, item, glyphs, i, &cluster_width,
|
|
|
5950 (item_list != NULL) ? &last_glyph_rbearing : NULL);
|
|
|
5951
|
|
|
5952 if (cellcount > 0)
|
|
|
5953 {
|
|
|
5954 int width;
|
|
|
5955
|
|
|
5956 width = cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5957 glyph->geometry.x_offset +=
|
|
|
5958 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2;
|
|
|
5959 glyph->geometry.width = width;
|
|
|
5960 }
|
|
|
5961 else
|
|
|
5962 {
|
|
|
5963 /* If there are only combining characters in the
|
|
|
5964 * cluster, we cannot just change the width of the
|
|
|
5965 * previous glyph since there is none. Therefore
|
|
|
5966 * some guesswork is needed. */
|
|
|
5967 setup_zero_width_cluster(item, glyph, cells,
|
|
|
5968 cluster_width,
|
|
|
5969 last_glyph_rbearing);
|
|
|
5970 }
|
|
|
5971
|
|
|
5972 item_cells += cellcount;
|
|
|
5973 cells = cellcount;
|
|
|
5974 }
|
|
|
5975 else if (i > 0)
|
|
|
5976 {
|
|
|
5977 int width;
|
|
|
5978
|
|
|
5979 /* There is a previous glyph, so we deal with combining
|
|
|
5980 * characters the canonical way. That is, setting the
|
|
|
5981 * width of the previous glyph to 0. */
|
|
|
5982 glyphs->glyphs[i - 1].geometry.width = 0;
|
|
|
5983 width = cells * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5984 glyph->geometry.x_offset +=
|
|
|
5985 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2;
|
|
497
|
5986 #if 0
|
|
|
5987 /* Dirty hack: for "monospace 13" font there is a bug that
|
|
|
5988 * draws composing chars in the wrong position. Add
|
|
|
5989 * "width" to the offset to work around that. */
|
|
|
5990 if (monospace13)
|
|
|
5991 glyph->geometry.x_offset = width;
|
|
|
5992 #endif
|
|
|
5993
|
|
7
|
5994 glyph->geometry.width = width;
|
|
|
5995 }
|
|
|
5996 else /* i == 0 "cannot happen" */
|
|
|
5997 {
|
|
|
5998 glyph->geometry.width = 0;
|
|
|
5999 }
|
|
|
6000 }
|
|
|
6001
|
|
|
6002 /*** Aaaaand action! ***/
|
|
|
6003 draw_glyph_string(row, col + column_offset, item_cells,
|
|
|
6004 flags, item->analysis.font, glyphs);
|
|
|
6005
|
|
|
6006 pango_item_free(item);
|
|
|
6007
|
|
|
6008 column_offset += item_cells;
|
|
|
6009 }
|
|
|
6010
|
|
|
6011 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list);
|
|
|
6012 }
|
|
|
6013
|
|
26
|
6014 skipitall:
|
|
207
|
6015 /* Draw underline and undercurl. */
|
|
|
6016 draw_under(flags, row, col, column_offset);
|
|
7
|
6017
|
|
|
6018 pango_glyph_string_free(glyphs);
|
|
|
6019 vim_free(conv_buf);
|
|
|
6020
|
|
|
6021 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, NULL);
|
|
|
6022
|
|
|
6023 return column_offset;
|
|
|
6024 }
|
|
|
6025 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
6026
|
|
|
6027 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6028 void
|
|
|
6029 gui_mch_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags)
|
|
|
6030 {
|
|
|
6031 static XChar2b *buf = NULL;
|
|
|
6032 static int buflen = 0;
|
|
|
6033 int is_wide;
|
|
|
6034 XChar2b *text;
|
|
|
6035 int textlen;
|
|
|
6036 XFontStruct *xfont;
|
|
|
6037 char_u *p;
|
|
|
6038 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
6039 unsigned c;
|
|
|
6040 # endif
|
|
|
6041 int width;
|
|
|
6042
|
|
|
6043 if (gui.current_font == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6044 return;
|
|
|
6045
|
|
|
6046 /*
|
|
|
6047 * Yeah yeah apparently the font support in GTK+ 1.2 only cares for either:
|
|
|
6048 * asians or 8-bit fonts. It is broken there, but no wonder the whole font
|
|
|
6049 * stuff is broken in X11 in first place. And the internationalization API
|
|
|
6050 * isn't something you would really like to use.
|
|
|
6051 */
|
|
|
6052
|
|
|
6053 xfont = (XFontStruct *)((GdkFontPrivate*)gui.current_font)->xfont;
|
|
|
6054 is_wide = ((xfont->min_byte1 != 0 || xfont->max_byte1 != 0)
|
|
|
6055 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
6056 && gui.fontset == NOFONTSET
|
|
|
6057 # endif
|
|
|
6058 );
|
|
|
6059
|
|
|
6060 if (is_wide)
|
|
|
6061 {
|
|
|
6062 /* Convert a byte sequence to 16 bit characters for the Gdk functions.
|
|
|
6063 * Need a buffer for the 16 bit characters. Keep it between calls,
|
|
|
6064 * because allocating it each time is slow. */
|
|
|
6065 if (buflen < len)
|
|
|
6066 {
|
|
|
6067 XtFree((char *)buf);
|
|
|
6068 buf = (XChar2b *)XtMalloc(len * sizeof(XChar2b));
|
|
|
6069 buflen = len;
|
|
|
6070 }
|
|
|
6071
|
|
|
6072 p = s;
|
|
|
6073 textlen = 0;
|
|
|
6074 width = 0;
|
|
|
6075 while (p < s + len)
|
|
|
6076 {
|
|
|
6077 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
6078 if (enc_utf8)
|
|
|
6079 {
|
|
|
6080 c = utf_ptr2char(p);
|
|
|
6081 if (c >= 0x10000) /* show chars > 0xffff as ? */
|
|
|
6082 c = 0xbf;
|
|
|
6083 buf[textlen].byte1 = c >> 8;
|
|
|
6084 buf[textlen].byte2 = c;
|
|
474
|
6085 p += utf_ptr2len(p);
|
|
7
|
6086 width += utf_char2cells(c);
|
|
|
6087 }
|
|
|
6088 else
|
|
|
6089 # endif
|
|
|
6090 {
|
|
|
6091 buf[textlen].byte1 = '\0'; /* high eight bits */
|
|
|
6092 buf[textlen].byte2 = *p; /* low eight bits */
|
|
|
6093 ++p;
|
|
|
6094 ++width;
|
|
|
6095 }
|
|
|
6096 ++textlen;
|
|
|
6097 }
|
|
|
6098 text = buf;
|
|
|
6099 textlen = textlen * 2;
|
|
|
6100 }
|
|
|
6101 else
|
|
|
6102 {
|
|
|
6103 text = (XChar2b *)s;
|
|
|
6104 textlen = len;
|
|
|
6105 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
6106 if (has_mbyte)
|
|
|
6107 {
|
|
|
6108 width = 0;
|
|
474
|
6109 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += (*mb_ptr2len)(p))
|
|
7
|
6110 width += (*mb_ptr2cells)(p);
|
|
|
6111 }
|
|
|
6112 else
|
|
|
6113 # endif
|
|
|
6114 width = len;
|
|
|
6115 }
|
|
|
6116
|
|
|
6117 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP))
|
|
|
6118 {
|
|
|
6119 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
6120 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6121 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6122 TRUE,
|
|
|
6123 FILL_X(col), FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
6124 width * gui.char_width, gui.char_height);
|
|
|
6125 }
|
|
|
6126 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6127 gdk_draw_text(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6128 gui.current_font,
|
|
|
6129 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6130 TEXT_X(col), TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
6131 (const gchar *)text, textlen);
|
|
|
6132
|
|
|
6133 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */
|
|
|
6134 if (flags & DRAW_BOLD)
|
|
|
6135 gdk_draw_text(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6136 gui.current_font,
|
|
|
6137 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6138 TEXT_X(col) + 1, TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
6139 (const gchar *)text, textlen);
|
|
|
6140
|
|
207
|
6141 /* Draw underline and undercurl. */
|
|
|
6142 draw_under(flags, row, col, width);
|
|
7
|
6143 }
|
|
|
6144 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
6145
|
|
|
6146 /*
|
|
|
6147 * Return OK if the key with the termcap name "name" is supported.
|
|
|
6148 */
|
|
|
6149 int
|
|
|
6150 gui_mch_haskey(char_u *name)
|
|
|
6151 {
|
|
|
6152 int i;
|
|
|
6153
|
|
|
6154 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++)
|
|
|
6155 if (name[0] == special_keys[i].code0
|
|
|
6156 && name[1] == special_keys[i].code1)
|
|
|
6157 return OK;
|
|
|
6158 return FAIL;
|
|
|
6159 }
|
|
|
6160
|
|
|
6161 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) \
|
|
|
6162 || (defined(FEAT_XIM) && !defined(HAVE_GTK2)) \
|
|
|
6163 || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6164 /*
|
|
|
6165 * Return the text window-id and display. Only required for X-based GUI's
|
|
|
6166 */
|
|
|
6167 int
|
|
|
6168 gui_get_x11_windis(Window *win, Display **dis)
|
|
|
6169 {
|
|
|
6170 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6171 {
|
|
|
6172 *dis = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
6173 *win = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
6174 return OK;
|
|
|
6175 }
|
|
|
6176
|
|
|
6177 *dis = NULL;
|
|
|
6178 *win = 0;
|
|
|
6179 return FAIL;
|
|
|
6180 }
|
|
|
6181 #endif
|
|
|
6182
|
|
|
6183 #if defined(FEAT_CLIENTSERVER) \
|
|
|
6184 || (defined(FEAT_X11) && defined(FEAT_CLIPBOARD)) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6185
|
|
|
6186 Display *
|
|
|
6187 gui_mch_get_display(void)
|
|
|
6188 {
|
|
|
6189 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6190 return GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
6191 else
|
|
|
6192 return NULL;
|
|
|
6193 }
|
|
|
6194 #endif
|
|
|
6195
|
|
|
6196 void
|
|
|
6197 gui_mch_beep(void)
|
|
|
6198 {
|
|
|
6199 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
6200 GdkDisplay *display;
|
|
|
6201
|
|
|
6202 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
6203 display = gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
6204 else
|
|
|
6205 display = gdk_display_get_default();
|
|
|
6206
|
|
|
6207 if (display != NULL)
|
|
|
6208 gdk_display_beep(display);
|
|
|
6209 #else
|
|
|
6210 gdk_beep();
|
|
|
6211 #endif
|
|
|
6212 }
|
|
|
6213
|
|
|
6214 void
|
|
|
6215 gui_mch_flash(int msec)
|
|
|
6216 {
|
|
|
6217 GdkGCValues values;
|
|
|
6218 GdkGC *invert_gc;
|
|
|
6219
|
|
|
6220 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6221 return;
|
|
|
6222
|
|
|
6223 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
6224 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
6225 values.function = GDK_XOR;
|
|
|
6226 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6227 &values,
|
|
|
6228 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND |
|
|
|
6229 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND |
|
|
|
6230 GDK_GC_FUNCTION);
|
|
|
6231 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc,
|
|
|
6232 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED);
|
|
|
6233 /*
|
|
|
6234 * Do a visual beep by changing back and forth in some undetermined way,
|
|
|
6235 * the foreground and background colors. This is due to the fact that
|
|
|
6236 * there can't be really any prediction about the effects of XOR on
|
|
|
6237 * arbitrary X11 servers. However this seems to be enough for what we
|
|
|
6238 * intend it to do.
|
|
|
6239 */
|
|
|
6240 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc,
|
|
|
6241 TRUE,
|
|
|
6242 0, 0,
|
|
|
6243 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset,
|
|
|
6244 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset);
|
|
|
6245
|
|
|
6246 gui_mch_flush();
|
|
|
6247 ui_delay((long)msec, TRUE); /* wait so many msec */
|
|
|
6248
|
|
|
6249 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc,
|
|
|
6250 TRUE,
|
|
|
6251 0, 0,
|
|
|
6252 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset,
|
|
|
6253 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset);
|
|
|
6254
|
|
|
6255 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc);
|
|
|
6256 }
|
|
|
6257
|
|
|
6258 /*
|
|
|
6259 * Invert a rectangle from row r, column c, for nr rows and nc columns.
|
|
|
6260 */
|
|
|
6261 void
|
|
|
6262 gui_mch_invert_rectangle(int r, int c, int nr, int nc)
|
|
|
6263 {
|
|
|
6264 GdkGCValues values;
|
|
|
6265 GdkGC *invert_gc;
|
|
|
6266
|
|
|
6267 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6268 return;
|
|
|
6269
|
|
944
|
6270 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
6271 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
7
|
6272 values.function = GDK_XOR;
|
|
|
6273 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6274 &values,
|
|
|
6275 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND |
|
|
|
6276 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND |
|
|
|
6277 GDK_GC_FUNCTION);
|
|
944
|
6278 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc, gui.visibility !=
|
|
|
6279 GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED);
|
|
7
|
6280 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc,
|
|
|
6281 TRUE,
|
|
|
6282 FILL_X(c), FILL_Y(r),
|
|
|
6283 (nc) * gui.char_width, (nr) * gui.char_height);
|
|
|
6284 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc);
|
|
|
6285 }
|
|
|
6286
|
|
|
6287 /*
|
|
|
6288 * Iconify the GUI window.
|
|
|
6289 */
|
|
|
6290 void
|
|
|
6291 gui_mch_iconify(void)
|
|
|
6292 {
|
|
|
6293 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6294 gtk_window_iconify(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
6295 #else
|
|
|
6296 XIconifyWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
6297 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
6298 DefaultScreen(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window)));
|
|
|
6299 #endif
|
|
|
6300 }
|
|
|
6301
|
|
|
6302 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6303 /*
|
|
|
6304 * Bring the Vim window to the foreground.
|
|
|
6305 */
|
|
|
6306 void
|
|
|
6307 gui_mch_set_foreground(void)
|
|
|
6308 {
|
|
|
6309 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6310 gtk_window_present(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
6311 # else
|
|
|
6312 gdk_window_raise(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
6313 # endif
|
|
|
6314 }
|
|
|
6315 #endif
|
|
|
6316
|
|
|
6317 /*
|
|
|
6318 * Draw a cursor without focus.
|
|
|
6319 */
|
|
|
6320 void
|
|
|
6321 gui_mch_draw_hollow_cursor(guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
6322 {
|
|
|
6323 int i = 1;
|
|
|
6324
|
|
|
6325 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6326 return;
|
|
|
6327
|
|
|
6328 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color);
|
|
|
6329
|
|
|
6330 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6331 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
6332 if (mb_lefthalve(gui.row, gui.col))
|
|
|
6333 i = 2;
|
|
|
6334 #endif
|
|
|
6335 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6336 FALSE,
|
|
|
6337 FILL_X(gui.col), FILL_Y(gui.row),
|
|
|
6338 i * gui.char_width - 1, gui.char_height - 1);
|
|
|
6339 }
|
|
|
6340
|
|
|
6341 /*
|
|
|
6342 * Draw part of a cursor, "w" pixels wide, and "h" pixels high, using
|
|
|
6343 * color "color".
|
|
|
6344 */
|
|
|
6345 void
|
|
|
6346 gui_mch_draw_part_cursor(int w, int h, guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
6347 {
|
|
|
6348 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6349 return;
|
|
|
6350
|
|
|
6351 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color);
|
|
|
6352
|
|
|
6353 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6354 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6355 TRUE,
|
|
|
6356 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
|
|
|
6357 /* vertical line should be on the right of current point */
|
|
|
6358 CURSOR_BAR_RIGHT ? FILL_X(gui.col + 1) - w :
|
|
|
6359 #endif
|
|
|
6360 FILL_X(gui.col),
|
|
|
6361 FILL_Y(gui.row) + gui.char_height - h,
|
|
|
6362 w, h);
|
|
|
6363 }
|
|
|
6364
|
|
|
6365
|
|
|
6366 /*
|
|
|
6367 * Catch up with any queued X11 events. This may put keyboard input into the
|
|
|
6368 * input buffer, call resize call-backs, trigger timers etc. If there is
|
|
|
6369 * nothing in the X11 event queue (& no timers pending), then we return
|
|
|
6370 * immediately.
|
|
|
6371 */
|
|
|
6372 void
|
|
|
6373 gui_mch_update(void)
|
|
|
6374 {
|
|
|
6375 while (gtk_events_pending() && !vim_is_input_buf_full())
|
|
|
6376 gtk_main_iteration_do(FALSE);
|
|
|
6377 }
|
|
|
6378
|
|
|
6379 static gint
|
|
|
6380 input_timer_cb(gpointer data)
|
|
|
6381 {
|
|
|
6382 int *timed_out = (int *) data;
|
|
|
6383
|
|
1226
|
6384 /* Just inform the caller about the occurrence of it */
|
|
7
|
6385 *timed_out = TRUE;
|
|
|
6386
|
|
|
6387 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
6388 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
6389
|
|
|
6390 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */
|
|
|
6391 }
|
|
|
6392
|
|
|
6393 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF
|
|
|
6394 /*
|
|
|
6395 * Callback function, used when data is available on the SNiFF connection.
|
|
|
6396 */
|
|
|
6397 static void
|
|
|
6398 sniff_request_cb(
|
|
|
6399 gpointer data,
|
|
|
6400 gint source_fd,
|
|
|
6401 GdkInputCondition condition)
|
|
|
6402 {
|
|
|
6403 static char_u bytes[3] = {CSI, (int)KS_EXTRA, (int)KE_SNIFF};
|
|
|
6404
|
|
|
6405 add_to_input_buf(bytes, 3);
|
|
|
6406
|
|
|
6407 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
6408 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
6409 }
|
|
|
6410 #endif
|
|
|
6411
|
|
|
6412 /*
|
|
|
6413 * GUI input routine called by gui_wait_for_chars(). Waits for a character
|
|
|
6414 * from the keyboard.
|
|
|
6415 * wtime == -1 Wait forever.
|
|
|
6416 * wtime == 0 This should never happen.
|
|
|
6417 * wtime > 0 Wait wtime milliseconds for a character.
|
|
|
6418 * Returns OK if a character was found to be available within the given time,
|
|
|
6419 * or FAIL otherwise.
|
|
|
6420 */
|
|
|
6421 int
|
|
|
6422 gui_mch_wait_for_chars(long wtime)
|
|
|
6423 {
|
|
|
6424 int focus;
|
|
|
6425 guint timer;
|
|
|
6426 static int timed_out;
|
|
|
6427 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF
|
|
|
6428 static int sniff_on = 0;
|
|
|
6429 static gint sniff_input_id = 0;
|
|
|
6430 #endif
|
|
|
6431
|
|
|
6432 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF
|
|
|
6433 if (sniff_on && !want_sniff_request)
|
|
|
6434 {
|
|
|
6435 if (sniff_input_id)
|
|
|
6436 gdk_input_remove(sniff_input_id);
|
|
|
6437 sniff_on = 0;
|
|
|
6438 }
|
|
|
6439 else if (!sniff_on && want_sniff_request)
|
|
|
6440 {
|
|
|
6441 /* Add fd_from_sniff to watch for available data in main loop. */
|
|
|
6442 sniff_input_id = gdk_input_add(fd_from_sniff,
|
|
|
6443 GDK_INPUT_READ, sniff_request_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
6444 sniff_on = 1;
|
|
|
6445 }
|
|
|
6446 #endif
|
|
|
6447
|
|
|
6448 timed_out = FALSE;
|
|
|
6449
|
|
|
6450 /* this timeout makes sure that we will return if no characters arrived in
|
|
|
6451 * time */
|
|
|
6452
|
|
|
6453 if (wtime > 0)
|
|
|
6454 timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)wtime, input_timer_cb, &timed_out);
|
|
|
6455 else
|
|
|
6456 timer = 0;
|
|
|
6457
|
|
|
6458 focus = gui.in_focus;
|
|
|
6459
|
|
|
6460 do
|
|
|
6461 {
|
|
|
6462 /* Stop or start blinking when focus changes */
|
|
|
6463 if (gui.in_focus != focus)
|
|
|
6464 {
|
|
|
6465 if (gui.in_focus)
|
|
|
6466 gui_mch_start_blink();
|
|
|
6467 else
|
|
|
6468 gui_mch_stop_blink();
|
|
|
6469 focus = gui.in_focus;
|
|
|
6470 }
|
|
|
6471
|
|
1624
|
6472 #if defined(FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG)
|
|
|
6473 /* Process the queued netbeans messages. */
|
|
|
6474 netbeans_parse_messages();
|
|
|
6475 #endif
|
|
|
6476
|
|
7
|
6477 /*
|
|
|
6478 * Loop in GTK+ processing until a timeout or input occurs.
|
|
22
|
6479 * Skip this if input is available anyway (can happen in rare
|
|
|
6480 * situations, sort of race condition).
|
|
7
|
6481 */
|
|
22
|
6482 if (!input_available())
|
|
|
6483 gtk_main();
|
|
7
|
6484
|
|
|
6485 /* Got char, return immediately */
|
|
|
6486 if (input_available())
|
|
|
6487 {
|
|
|
6488 if (timer != 0 && !timed_out)
|
|
|
6489 gtk_timeout_remove(timer);
|
|
|
6490 return OK;
|
|
|
6491 }
|
|
|
6492 } while (wtime < 0 || !timed_out);
|
|
|
6493
|
|
|
6494 /*
|
|
|
6495 * Flush all eventually pending (drawing) events.
|
|
|
6496 */
|
|
|
6497 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6498
|
|
|
6499 return FAIL;
|
|
|
6500 }
|
|
|
6501
|
|
|
6502
|
|
|
6503 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
6504 * Output drawing routines.
|
|
|
6505 ****************************************************************************/
|
|
|
6506
|
|
|
6507
|
|
|
6508 /* Flush any output to the screen */
|
|
|
6509 void
|
|
|
6510 gui_mch_flush(void)
|
|
|
6511 {
|
|
|
6512 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
6513 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
6514 gdk_display_sync(gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
6515 #else
|
|
|
6516 gdk_flush(); /* historical misnomer: calls XSync(), not XFlush() */
|
|
|
6517 #endif
|
|
|
6518 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6519 /* This happens to actually do what gui_mch_flush() is supposed to do,
|
|
|
6520 * according to the comment above. */
|
|
|
6521 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6522 gdk_window_process_updates(gui.drawarea->window, FALSE);
|
|
|
6523 #endif
|
|
|
6524 }
|
|
|
6525
|
|
|
6526 /*
|
|
|
6527 * Clear a rectangular region of the screen from text pos (row1, col1) to
|
|
|
6528 * (row2, col2) inclusive.
|
|
|
6529 */
|
|
|
6530 void
|
|
|
6531 gui_mch_clear_block(int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2)
|
|
|
6532 {
|
|
|
6533 GdkColor color;
|
|
|
6534
|
|
|
6535 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6536 return;
|
|
|
6537
|
|
|
6538 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
6539
|
|
|
6540 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, &color);
|
|
|
6541
|
|
|
6542 /* Clear one extra pixel at the far right, for when bold characters have
|
|
|
6543 * spilled over to the window border. */
|
|
|
6544 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, TRUE,
|
|
|
6545 FILL_X(col1), FILL_Y(row1),
|
|
|
6546 (col2 - col1 + 1) * gui.char_width
|
|
|
6547 + (col2 == Columns - 1),
|
|
|
6548 (row2 - row1 + 1) * gui.char_height);
|
|
|
6549 }
|
|
|
6550
|
|
|
6551 void
|
|
|
6552 gui_mch_clear_all(void)
|
|
|
6553 {
|
|
|
6554 if (gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6555 gdk_window_clear(gui.drawarea->window);
|
|
|
6556 }
|
|
|
6557
|
|
|
6558 /*
|
|
|
6559 * Redraw any text revealed by scrolling up/down.
|
|
|
6560 */
|
|
|
6561 static void
|
|
|
6562 check_copy_area(void)
|
|
|
6563 {
|
|
|
6564 GdkEvent *event;
|
|
|
6565 int expose_count;
|
|
|
6566
|
|
|
6567 if (gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_PARTIAL)
|
|
|
6568 return;
|
|
|
6569
|
|
|
6570 /* Avoid redrawing the cursor while scrolling or it'll end up where
|
|
|
6571 * we don't want it to be. I'm not sure if it's correct to call
|
|
|
6572 * gui_dont_update_cursor() at this point but it works as a quick
|
|
|
6573 * fix for now. */
|
|
|
6574 gui_dont_update_cursor();
|
|
|
6575
|
|
|
6576 do
|
|
|
6577 {
|
|
|
6578 /* Wait to check whether the scroll worked or not. */
|
|
|
6579 event = gdk_event_get_graphics_expose(gui.drawarea->window);
|
|
|
6580
|
|
|
6581 if (event == NULL)
|
|
|
6582 break; /* received NoExpose event */
|
|
|
6583
|
|
|
6584 gui_redraw(event->expose.area.x, event->expose.area.y,
|
|
|
6585 event->expose.area.width, event->expose.area.height);
|
|
|
6586
|
|
|
6587 expose_count = event->expose.count;
|
|
|
6588 gdk_event_free(event);
|
|
|
6589 }
|
|
|
6590 while (expose_count > 0); /* more events follow */
|
|
|
6591
|
|
|
6592 gui_can_update_cursor();
|
|
|
6593 }
|
|
|
6594
|
|
|
6595 /*
|
|
|
6596 * Delete the given number of lines from the given row, scrolling up any
|
|
|
6597 * text further down within the scroll region.
|
|
|
6598 */
|
|
|
6599 void
|
|
|
6600 gui_mch_delete_lines(int row, int num_lines)
|
|
|
6601 {
|
|
|
6602 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED)
|
|
|
6603 return; /* Can't see the window */
|
|
|
6604
|
|
|
6605 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6606 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
6607
|
|
|
6608 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */
|
|
|
6609 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6610 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
6611 gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6612 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left),
|
|
|
6613 FILL_Y(row + num_lines),
|
|
|
6614 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right
|
|
|
6615 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1,
|
|
|
6616 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1));
|
|
|
6617
|
|
|
6618 gui_clear_block(gui.scroll_region_bot - num_lines + 1,
|
|
|
6619 gui.scroll_region_left,
|
|
|
6620 gui.scroll_region_bot, gui.scroll_region_right);
|
|
|
6621 check_copy_area();
|
|
|
6622 }
|
|
|
6623
|
|
|
6624 /*
|
|
|
6625 * Insert the given number of lines before the given row, scrolling down any
|
|
|
6626 * following text within the scroll region.
|
|
|
6627 */
|
|
|
6628 void
|
|
|
6629 gui_mch_insert_lines(int row, int num_lines)
|
|
|
6630 {
|
|
|
6631 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED)
|
|
|
6632 return; /* Can't see the window */
|
|
|
6633
|
|
|
6634 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6635 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
6636
|
|
|
6637 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */
|
|
|
6638 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6639 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row + num_lines),
|
|
|
6640 gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6641 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
6642 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right
|
|
|
6643 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1,
|
|
|
6644 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1));
|
|
|
6645
|
|
|
6646 gui_clear_block(row, gui.scroll_region_left,
|
|
|
6647 row + num_lines - 1, gui.scroll_region_right);
|
|
|
6648 check_copy_area();
|
|
|
6649 }
|
|
|
6650
|
|
|
6651 /*
|
|
|
6652 * X Selection stuff, for cutting and pasting text to other windows.
|
|
|
6653 */
|
|
|
6654 void
|
|
|
6655 clip_mch_request_selection(VimClipboard *cbd)
|
|
|
6656 {
|
|
|
6657 GdkAtom target;
|
|
|
6658 unsigned i;
|
|
|
6659 int nbytes;
|
|
|
6660 char_u *buffer;
|
|
1494
|
6661 time_t start;
|
|
7
|
6662
|
|
|
6663 for (i = 0; i < N_SELECTION_TARGETS; ++i)
|
|
|
6664 {
|
|
|
6665 received_selection = RS_NONE;
|
|
|
6666 target = gdk_atom_intern(selection_targets[i].target, FALSE);
|
|
|
6667
|
|
|
6668 gtk_selection_convert(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
6669 cbd->gtk_sel_atom, target,
|
|
|
6670 (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
|
|
|
6671
|
|
1494
|
6672 /* Hack: Wait up to three seconds for the selection. A hang was
|
|
|
6673 * noticed here when using the netrw plugin combined with ":gui"
|
|
|
6674 * during the FocusGained event. */
|
|
|
6675 start = time(NULL);
|
|
|
6676 while (received_selection == RS_NONE && time(NULL) < start + 3)
|
|
7
|
6677 gtk_main(); /* wait for selection_received_cb */
|
|
|
6678
|
|
|
6679 if (received_selection != RS_FAIL)
|
|
|
6680 return;
|
|
|
6681 }
|
|
|
6682
|
|
|
6683 /* Final fallback position - use the X CUT_BUFFER0 store */
|
|
|
6684 nbytes = 0;
|
|
|
6685 buffer = (char_u *)XFetchBuffer(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
6686 &nbytes, 0);
|
|
|
6687 if (nbytes > 0)
|
|
|
6688 {
|
|
|
6689 /* Got something */
|
|
|
6690 clip_yank_selection(MCHAR, buffer, (long)nbytes, cbd);
|
|
|
6691 if (p_verbose > 0)
|
|
294
|
6692 {
|
|
|
6693 verbose_enter();
|
|
7
|
6694 smsg((char_u *)_("Used CUT_BUFFER0 instead of empty selection"));
|
|
294
|
6695 verbose_leave();
|
|
|
6696 }
|
|
7
|
6697 }
|
|
|
6698 if (buffer != NULL)
|
|
|
6699 XFree(buffer);
|
|
|
6700 }
|
|
|
6701
|
|
|
6702 /*
|
|
|
6703 * Disown the selection.
|
|
|
6704 */
|
|
|
6705 void
|
|
1884
|
6706 clip_mch_lose_selection(VimClipboard *cbd UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
6707 {
|
|
|
6708 /* WEIRD: when using NULL to actually disown the selection, we lose the
|
|
|
6709 * selection the first time we own it. */
|
|
|
6710 /*
|
|
|
6711 gtk_selection_owner_set(NULL, cbd->gtk_sel_atom, (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
|
|
|
6712 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6713 */
|
|
|
6714 }
|
|
|
6715
|
|
|
6716 /*
|
|
|
6717 * Own the selection and return OK if it worked.
|
|
|
6718 */
|
|
|
6719 int
|
|
|
6720 clip_mch_own_selection(VimClipboard *cbd)
|
|
|
6721 {
|
|
|
6722 int success;
|
|
|
6723
|
|
|
6724 success = gtk_selection_owner_set(gui.drawarea, cbd->gtk_sel_atom,
|
|
|
6725 (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
|
|
|
6726 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6727 return (success) ? OK : FAIL;
|
|
|
6728 }
|
|
|
6729
|
|
|
6730 /*
|
|
|
6731 * Send the current selection to the clipboard. Do nothing for X because we
|
|
|
6732 * will fill in the selection only when requested by another app.
|
|
|
6733 */
|
|
|
6734 void
|
|
1884
|
6735 clip_mch_set_selection(VimClipboard *cbd UNUSED)
|
|
7
|
6736 {
|
|
|
6737 }
|
|
|
6738
|
|
|
6739
|
|
|
6740 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6741 /*
|
|
|
6742 * Make a menu item appear either active or not active (grey or not grey).
|
|
|
6743 */
|
|
|
6744 void
|
|
|
6745 gui_mch_menu_grey(vimmenu_T *menu, int grey)
|
|
|
6746 {
|
|
|
6747 if (menu->id == NULL)
|
|
|
6748 return;
|
|
|
6749
|
|
|
6750 if (menu_is_separator(menu->name))
|
|
|
6751 grey = TRUE;
|
|
|
6752
|
|
|
6753 gui_mch_menu_hidden(menu, FALSE);
|
|
|
6754 /* Be clever about bitfields versus true booleans here! */
|
|
|
6755 if (!GTK_WIDGET_SENSITIVE(menu->id) == !grey)
|
|
|
6756 {
|
|
|
6757 gtk_widget_set_sensitive(menu->id, !grey);
|
|
|
6758 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6759 }
|
|
|
6760 }
|
|
|
6761
|
|
|
6762 /*
|
|
|
6763 * Make menu item hidden or not hidden.
|
|
|
6764 */
|
|
|
6765 void
|
|
|
6766 gui_mch_menu_hidden(vimmenu_T *menu, int hidden)
|
|
|
6767 {
|
|
|
6768 if (menu->id == 0)
|
|
|
6769 return;
|
|
|
6770
|
|
|
6771 if (hidden)
|
|
|
6772 {
|
|
|
6773 if (GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id))
|
|
|
6774 {
|
|
|
6775 gtk_widget_hide(menu->id);
|
|
|
6776 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6777 }
|
|
|
6778 }
|
|
|
6779 else
|
|
|
6780 {
|
|
|
6781 if (!GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id))
|
|
|
6782 {
|
|
|
6783 gtk_widget_show(menu->id);
|
|
|
6784 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6785 }
|
|
|
6786 }
|
|
|
6787 }
|
|
|
6788
|
|
|
6789 /*
|
|
|
6790 * This is called after setting all the menus to grey/hidden or not.
|
|
|
6791 */
|
|
|
6792 void
|
|
|
6793 gui_mch_draw_menubar(void)
|
|
|
6794 {
|
|
|
6795 /* just make sure that the visual changes get effect immediately */
|
|
|
6796 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6797 }
|
|
|
6798 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */
|
|
|
6799
|
|
|
6800 /*
|
|
|
6801 * Scrollbar stuff.
|
|
|
6802 */
|
|
|
6803 void
|
|
|
6804 gui_mch_enable_scrollbar(scrollbar_T *sb, int flag)
|
|
|
6805 {
|
|
|
6806 if (sb->id == NULL)
|
|
|
6807 return;
|
|
|
6808
|
|
|
6809 if (flag)
|
|
|
6810 gtk_widget_show(sb->id);
|
|
|
6811 else
|
|
|
6812 gtk_widget_hide(sb->id);
|
|
|
6813
|
|
791
|
6814 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
7
|
6815 }
|
|
|
6816
|
|
|
6817
|
|
|
6818 /*
|
|
|
6819 * Return the RGB value of a pixel as long.
|
|
|
6820 */
|
|
|
6821 long_u
|
|
|
6822 gui_mch_get_rgb(guicolor_T pixel)
|
|
|
6823 {
|
|
|
6824 GdkColor color;
|
|
|
6825 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6826 GdkColorContext *cc;
|
|
|
6827
|
|
|
6828 cc = gdk_color_context_new(gtk_widget_get_visual(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
6829 gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea));
|
|
|
6830 color.pixel = pixel;
|
|
|
6831 gdk_color_context_query_color(cc, &color);
|
|
|
6832
|
|
|
6833 gdk_color_context_free(cc);
|
|
|
6834 #else
|
|
|
6835 gdk_colormap_query_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
6836 (unsigned long)pixel, &color);
|
|
|
6837 #endif
|
|
|
6838
|
|
|
6839 return (((unsigned)color.red & 0xff00) << 8)
|
|
|
6840 | ((unsigned)color.green & 0xff00)
|
|
|
6841 | (((unsigned)color.blue & 0xff00) >> 8);
|
|
|
6842 }
|
|
|
6843
|
|
|
6844 /*
|
|
88
|
6845 * Get current mouse coordinates in text window.
|
|
7
|
6846 */
|
|
88
|
6847 void
|
|
|
6848 gui_mch_getmouse(int *x, int *y)
|
|
7
|
6849 {
|
|
88
|
6850 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, x, y, NULL);
|
|
7
|
6851 }
|
|
|
6852
|
|
|
6853 void
|
|
|
6854 gui_mch_setmouse(int x, int y)
|
|
|
6855 {
|
|
|
6856 /* Sorry for the Xlib call, but we can't avoid it, since there is no
|
|
|
6857 * internal GDK mechanism present to accomplish this. (and for good
|
|
|
6858 * reason...) */
|
|
|
6859 XWarpPointer(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.drawarea->window),
|
|
|
6860 (Window)0, GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.drawarea->window),
|
|
|
6861 0, 0, 0U, 0U, x, y);
|
|
|
6862 }
|
|
|
6863
|
|
|
6864
|
|
|
6865 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE
|
|
|
6866 /* The last set mouse pointer shape is remembered, to be used when it goes
|
|
|
6867 * from hidden to not hidden. */
|
|
|
6868 static int last_shape = 0;
|
|
|
6869 #endif
|
|
|
6870
|
|
|
6871 /*
|
|
|
6872 * Use the blank mouse pointer or not.
|
|
|
6873 *
|
|
|
6874 * hide: TRUE = use blank ptr, FALSE = use parent ptr
|
|
|
6875 */
|
|
|
6876 void
|
|
|
6877 gui_mch_mousehide(int hide)
|
|
|
6878 {
|
|
|
6879 if (gui.pointer_hidden != hide)
|
|
|
6880 {
|
|
|
6881 gui.pointer_hidden = hide;
|
|
|
6882 if (gui.drawarea->window && gui.blank_pointer != NULL)
|
|
|
6883 {
|
|
|
6884 if (hide)
|
|
|
6885 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
6886 else
|
|
|
6887 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE
|
|
|
6888 mch_set_mouse_shape(last_shape);
|
|
|
6889 #else
|
|
|
6890 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, NULL);
|
|
|
6891 #endif
|
|
|
6892 }
|
|
|
6893 }
|
|
|
6894 }
|
|
|
6895
|
|
|
6896 #if defined(FEAT_MOUSESHAPE) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6897
|
|
|
6898 /* Table for shape IDs. Keep in sync with the mshape_names[] table in
|
|
|
6899 * misc2.c! */
|
|
|
6900 static const int mshape_ids[] =
|
|
|
6901 {
|
|
|
6902 GDK_LEFT_PTR, /* arrow */
|
|
|
6903 GDK_CURSOR_IS_PIXMAP, /* blank */
|
|
|
6904 GDK_XTERM, /* beam */
|
|
|
6905 GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* updown */
|
|
|
6906 GDK_SIZING, /* udsizing */
|
|
|
6907 GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* leftright */
|
|
|
6908 GDK_SIZING, /* lrsizing */
|
|
|
6909 GDK_WATCH, /* busy */
|
|
|
6910 GDK_X_CURSOR, /* no */
|
|
|
6911 GDK_CROSSHAIR, /* crosshair */
|
|
|
6912 GDK_HAND1, /* hand1 */
|
|
|
6913 GDK_HAND2, /* hand2 */
|
|
|
6914 GDK_PENCIL, /* pencil */
|
|
|
6915 GDK_QUESTION_ARROW, /* question */
|
|
|
6916 GDK_RIGHT_PTR, /* right-arrow */
|
|
|
6917 GDK_CENTER_PTR, /* up-arrow */
|
|
|
6918 GDK_LEFT_PTR /* last one */
|
|
|
6919 };
|
|
|
6920
|
|
|
6921 void
|
|
|
6922 mch_set_mouse_shape(int shape)
|
|
|
6923 {
|
|
|
6924 int id;
|
|
|
6925 GdkCursor *c;
|
|
|
6926
|
|
|
6927 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6928 return;
|
|
|
6929
|
|
|
6930 if (shape == MSHAPE_HIDE || gui.pointer_hidden)
|
|
|
6931 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
6932 else
|
|
|
6933 {
|
|
|
6934 if (shape >= MSHAPE_NUMBERED)
|
|
|
6935 {
|
|
|
6936 id = shape - MSHAPE_NUMBERED;
|
|
|
6937 if (id >= GDK_LAST_CURSOR)
|
|
|
6938 id = GDK_LEFT_PTR;
|
|
|
6939 else
|
|
|
6940 id &= ~1; /* they are always even (why?) */
|
|
|
6941 }
|
|
1884
|
6942 else if (shape < (int)(sizeof(mshape_ids) / sizeof(int)))
|
|
7
|
6943 id = mshape_ids[shape];
|
|
842
|
6944 else
|
|
|
6945 return;
|
|
7
|
6946 # ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
6947 c = gdk_cursor_new_for_display(
|
|
136
|
6948 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.drawarea), (GdkCursorType)id);
|
|
7
|
6949 # else
|
|
136
|
6950 c = gdk_cursor_new((GdkCursorType)id);
|
|
7
|
6951 # endif
|
|
|
6952 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, c);
|
|
|
6953 gdk_cursor_destroy(c); /* Unref, actually. Bloody GTK+ 1. */
|
|
|
6954 }
|
|
|
6955 if (shape != MSHAPE_HIDE)
|
|
|
6956 last_shape = shape;
|
|
|
6957 }
|
|
|
6958 #endif /* FEAT_MOUSESHAPE */
|
|
|
6959
|
|
|
6960
|
|
|
6961 #if defined(FEAT_SIGN_ICONS) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6962 /*
|
|
|
6963 * Signs are currently always 2 chars wide. With GTK+ 2, the image will be
|
|
|
6964 * scaled down if the current font is not big enough, or scaled up if the image
|
|
|
6965 * size is less than 3/4 of the maximum sign size. With GTK+ 1, the pixmap
|
|
|
6966 * will be cut off if the current font is not big enough, or centered if it's
|
|
|
6967 * too small.
|
|
|
6968 */
|
|
|
6969 # define SIGN_WIDTH (2 * gui.char_width)
|
|
|
6970 # define SIGN_HEIGHT (gui.char_height)
|
|
|
6971 # define SIGN_ASPECT ((double)SIGN_HEIGHT / (double)SIGN_WIDTH)
|
|
|
6972
|
|
|
6973 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6974
|
|
|
6975 void
|
|
|
6976 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr)
|
|
|
6977 {
|
|
|
6978 GdkPixbuf *sign;
|
|
|
6979
|
|
|
6980 sign = (GdkPixbuf *)sign_get_image(typenr);
|
|
|
6981
|
|
|
6982 if (sign != NULL && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6983 {
|
|
|
6984 int width;
|
|
|
6985 int height;
|
|
|
6986 int xoffset;
|
|
|
6987 int yoffset;
|
|
|
6988 int need_scale;
|
|
|
6989
|
|
|
6990 width = gdk_pixbuf_get_width(sign);
|
|
|
6991 height = gdk_pixbuf_get_height(sign);
|
|
|
6992 /*
|
|
|
6993 * Decide whether we need to scale. Allow one pixel of border
|
|
|
6994 * width to be cut off, in order to avoid excessive scaling for
|
|
|
6995 * tiny differences in font size.
|
|
|
6996 */
|
|
|
6997 need_scale = (width > SIGN_WIDTH + 2
|
|
|
6998 || height > SIGN_HEIGHT + 2
|
|
|
6999 || (width < 3 * SIGN_WIDTH / 4
|
|
|
7000 && height < 3 * SIGN_HEIGHT / 4));
|
|
|
7001 if (need_scale)
|
|
|
7002 {
|
|
|
7003 double aspect;
|
|
|
7004
|
|
|
7005 /* Keep the original aspect ratio */
|
|
|
7006 aspect = (double)height / (double)width;
|
|
|
7007 width = (double)SIGN_WIDTH * SIGN_ASPECT / aspect;
|
|
|
7008 width = MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH);
|
|
|
7009 height = (double)width * aspect;
|
|
|
7010
|
|
|
7011 /* This doesn't seem to be worth caching, and doing so
|
|
|
7012 * would complicate the code quite a bit. */
|
|
|
7013 sign = gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple(sign, width, height,
|
|
|
7014 GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR);
|
|
|
7015 if (sign == NULL)
|
|
|
7016 return; /* out of memory */
|
|
|
7017 }
|
|
|
7018
|
|
|
7019 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore
|
|
|
7020 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than
|
|
|
7021 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */
|
|
|
7022 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2;
|
|
|
7023 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2;
|
|
|
7024
|
|
|
7025 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
7026
|
|
|
7027 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
7028 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
7029 TRUE,
|
|
|
7030 FILL_X(col),
|
|
|
7031 FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
7032 SIGN_WIDTH,
|
|
|
7033 SIGN_HEIGHT);
|
|
|
7034
|
|
|
7035 # if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,1)
|
|
|
7036 gdk_draw_pixbuf(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
7037 NULL,
|
|
|
7038 sign,
|
|
|
7039 MAX(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
7040 MAX(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
7041 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
7042 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
7043 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH),
|
|
|
7044 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT),
|
|
|
7045 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL,
|
|
|
7046 0, 0);
|
|
|
7047 # else
|
|
|
7048 gdk_pixbuf_render_to_drawable_alpha(sign,
|
|
|
7049 gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
7050 MAX(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
7051 MAX(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
7052 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
7053 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
7054 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH),
|
|
|
7055 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT),
|
|
|
7056 GDK_PIXBUF_ALPHA_BILEVEL,
|
|
|
7057 127,
|
|
|
7058 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL,
|
|
|
7059 0, 0);
|
|
|
7060 # endif
|
|
|
7061 if (need_scale)
|
|
|
7062 g_object_unref(sign);
|
|
|
7063 }
|
|
|
7064 }
|
|
|
7065
|
|
|
7066 void *
|
|
|
7067 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile)
|
|
|
7068 {
|
|
|
7069 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-' && gui.in_use)
|
|
|
7070 {
|
|
|
7071 GdkPixbuf *sign;
|
|
|
7072 GError *error = NULL;
|
|
|
7073 char_u *message;
|
|
|
7074
|
|
|
7075 sign = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file((const char *)signfile, &error);
|
|
|
7076
|
|
|
7077 if (error == NULL)
|
|
|
7078 return sign;
|
|
|
7079
|
|
|
7080 message = (char_u *)error->message;
|
|
|
7081
|
|
|
7082 if (message != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
7083 message = string_convert(&input_conv, message, NULL);
|
|
|
7084
|
|
|
7085 if (message != NULL)
|
|
|
7086 {
|
|
|
7087 /* The error message is already translated and will be more
|
|
|
7088 * descriptive than anything we could possibly do ourselves. */
|
|
|
7089 EMSG2("E255: %s", message);
|
|
|
7090
|
|
|
7091 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
7092 vim_free(message);
|
|
|
7093 }
|
|
|
7094 g_error_free(error);
|
|
|
7095 }
|
|
|
7096
|
|
|
7097 return NULL;
|
|
|
7098 }
|
|
|
7099
|
|
|
7100 void
|
|
|
7101 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign)
|
|
|
7102 {
|
|
|
7103 if (sign != NULL)
|
|
|
7104 g_object_unref(sign);
|
|
|
7105 }
|
|
|
7106
|
|
|
7107 # else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
7108
|
|
|
7109 typedef struct
|
|
|
7110 {
|
|
|
7111 GdkPixmap *pixmap;
|
|
|
7112 GdkBitmap *mask;
|
|
|
7113 }
|
|
|
7114 signicon_T;
|
|
|
7115
|
|
|
7116 void
|
|
|
7117 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr)
|
|
|
7118 {
|
|
|
7119 signicon_T *sign;
|
|
|
7120
|
|
|
7121 sign = (signicon_T *)sign_get_image(typenr);
|
|
|
7122
|
|
|
7123 if (sign != NULL && sign->pixmap != NULL
|
|
|
7124 && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
7125 {
|
|
|
7126 int width;
|
|
|
7127 int height;
|
|
|
7128 int xoffset;
|
|
|
7129 int yoffset;
|
|
|
7130
|
|
|
7131 gdk_window_get_size(sign->pixmap, &width, &height);
|
|
|
7132
|
|
|
7133 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore
|
|
|
7134 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than
|
|
|
7135 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */
|
|
|
7136 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2;
|
|
|
7137 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2;
|
|
|
7138
|
|
|
7139 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
7140
|
|
|
7141 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
7142 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
7143 TRUE,
|
|
|
7144 FILL_X(col),
|
|
|
7145 FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
7146 SIGN_WIDTH,
|
|
|
7147 SIGN_HEIGHT);
|
|
|
7148
|
|
|
7149 /* Set the clip mask for bilevel transparency */
|
|
|
7150 if (sign->mask != NULL)
|
|
|
7151 {
|
|
|
7152 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
7153 FILL_X(col) - xoffset,
|
|
|
7154 FILL_Y(row) - yoffset);
|
|
|
7155 gdk_gc_set_clip_mask(gui.text_gc, sign->mask);
|
|
|
7156 }
|
|
|
7157
|
|
|
7158 gdk_draw_pixmap(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
7159 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
7160 sign->pixmap,
|
|
|
7161 MAX(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
7162 MAX(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
7163 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
7164 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
7165 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH),
|
|
|
7166 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT));
|
|
|
7167
|
|
|
7168 gdk_gc_set_clip_mask(gui.text_gc, NULL);
|
|
|
7169 }
|
|
|
7170 }
|
|
|
7171
|
|
|
7172 void *
|
|
|
7173 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile)
|
|
|
7174 {
|
|
|
7175 signicon_T *sign = NULL;
|
|
|
7176
|
|
|
7177 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-'
|
|
|
7178 && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
7179 {
|
|
|
7180 sign = (signicon_T *)alloc(sizeof(signicon_T));
|
|
|
7181
|
|
|
7182 if (sign != NULL) /* NULL == OOM == "cannot really happen" */
|
|
|
7183 {
|
|
|
7184 sign->mask = NULL;
|
|
|
7185 sign->pixmap = gdk_pixmap_colormap_create_from_xpm(
|
|
|
7186 gui.drawarea->window, NULL,
|
|
|
7187 &sign->mask, NULL,
|
|
|
7188 (const char *)signfile);
|
|
|
7189
|
|
|
7190 if (sign->pixmap == NULL)
|
|
|
7191 {
|
|
|
7192 vim_free(sign);
|
|
|
7193 sign = NULL;
|
|
|
7194 EMSG(_(e_signdata));
|
|
|
7195 }
|
|
|
7196 }
|
|
|
7197 }
|
|
|
7198 return sign;
|
|
|
7199 }
|
|
|
7200
|
|
|
7201 void
|
|
|
7202 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign)
|
|
|
7203 {
|
|
|
7204 if (sign != NULL)
|
|
|
7205 {
|
|
|
7206 signicon_T *signicon = (signicon_T *)sign;
|
|
|
7207
|
|
|
7208 if (signicon->pixmap != NULL)
|
|
|
7209 gdk_pixmap_unref(signicon->pixmap);
|
|
|
7210 if (signicon->mask != NULL)
|
|
|
7211 gdk_bitmap_unref(signicon->mask);
|
|
|
7212
|
|
|
7213 vim_free(signicon);
|
|
|
7214 }
|
|
|
7215 }
|
|
|
7216 # endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
7217
|
|
|
7218 #endif /* FEAT_SIGN_ICONS */
|
